STRATA TX TECH REF MANUAL Rev C

STRATA TX System
Analog + Digital Portable 1.9 -2.5,

2.3 - 2.7 GHz Microwave Transmitter
Technical Reference Manual

Manual Part No. 400502-1
Rev. C February 2007
Notices Proprietary Material
The information and design contained within this manual was
originated by and is the property of Microwave Radio
About This Manual Communications. Microwave Radio Communications reserves
Part number 400502-1 all patent proprietary design, manufacturing, reproduction use,
and sales rights thereto, and to any articles disclosed therein,
Revision C - February 2007
except to the extent rights are expressly granted to others. The
The information in the manual applies to the Microwave Radio foregoing does not apply to vendor proprietary parts.
Communications (MRC) STRATA TX System.
Microwave Radio Communications has made every effort to
ensure the accuracy of the material contained in this manual at
Copyright the time of printing. As specifications, equipment, and this
The information in this manual may only be reproduced by the manual are subject to change without notice, Microwave Radio
purchaser strictly for its own internal use to the extent required Communications assumes no responsibility or liability
for its use of the product, and shall only be made available to whatsoever for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in this
purchaser’s employees who need access to this material. No manual or for any decisions based on its use. This manual is
part of this material, nor any copies hereof, shall in any manner supplied for information purposes only and should not be
be disclosed, disseminated, or made available by purchaser or construed as a commitment by Microwave Radio
its employees to any other person, firm, or entity without the Communications.
express prior written consent of Microwave Radio
Communications nor shall the same in any manner be modified Quality Certification
or published for resale without the express prior written
Microwave Radio Communications is certified to ISO 9001:2000.
authorization of Microwave Radio Communications.
© 2007 Microwave Radio Communications Regulatory Status
Microwave Radio Communications This product is certified to conform to CENELEC standards EN
101 Billerica Avenue - Bldg. 6 55020, EN 55013, EN 50082-1, and EN 60950 and carries the
CE mark.
North Billerica, MA 01862-1256USA
TEL: 800.490.5700
978.671.5700
FAX: 978.671.5800
Printed in U.S.A.
Authorized EU representative: Vislink PLC.
STRATA TX Technical Reference Manual i

Conventions Symbols Used
Pay special attention to information marked in one of the The following symbols are used on the equipment:
following ways:
Symbol Meaning
WARNING Follow WARNINGS closely to prevent
personal injury or death. WARNING: General Warning. Risk of Danger
CAUTION Follow CAUTIONS to prevent damage to WARNING: Risk of Electric Shock

the equipment.
CAUTION: Electrostatic Discharge. Possible

Damage to Equipment
Note Notes provide additional information to assist you
in using and maintaining the equipment.
Fuse - Identifies fuses or their location.
On-Line Viewing -OR-

Text displayed as blue contains a hypertext link. Click on the
hypertext to jump to that destination. Click on the blue
destination to return. Frame or Chassis Ground - Identifies the frame or
chassis terminal.
Viewing this manual on-line Earth Ground - Identifies the earth Ground Terminal
requires Adobe Acrobat,
version 4.0 or above. Protective Earth Ground - Identifies any terminal
which is intended for connection to an external
Click on this icon to download your conductor for protection against electric shock in
FREE copy of Adobe Acrobat case of a fault, or the terminal on a protective earth
Reader. electrode.
STRATA TX Technical Reference Manual ii

Warranty Information ordinary use; (2) if the product has been modified by Buyer or
has been repaired or altered outside MRC's repair facility, unless
MRC specifically authorizes such repairs or alterations in each
Product Manufactured by MRC: instance; or (3) where MRC serial numbers, warranty data, or
a. Products manufactured by MRC are warranted against quality assurance decals have been removed or altered.
defects in material and workmanship for a period of two (2) years e. Equipment shipped FOB from Microwave Radio
from date of delivery as evidenced by MRC's packing slip or Communications shall become the property of the buyer upon
other transportation receipt (unless otherwise noted). delivery and receipt from the carrier. Any damage in shipment
b. MRC's sole responsibility under this warranty will be to either should be handled by the buyer directly with the carrier.
repair or replace, at its option, any component which fails during Immediately request the carrier’s inspection upon evidence of
the applicable warranty period because of a defect in material or damage during shipment. Do not return any Microwave Radio
workmanship, provided Buyer has promptly reported same to Communications product to the factory until a Return Material
MRC in writing. All replaced products and parts will become Authorization (RMA) number and shipping instructions have
MRC's property. been provided.
c. MRC will honor the warranty at the repair facility designated f. No person, including any dealer, agent or representative of
by MRC. It is Buyer's responsibility to return, at its expense, the MRC is authorized to assume for MRC any other liability on its
allegedly defective product to MRC. Buyer must obtain a Return behalf except as set forth herein. If any payment is due MRC for
Material Authorization (RMA) number and shipping instructions services performed hereunder, it will be subject to the same
from MRC prior to returning any product under warranty. payment terms as the original purchase.
Transportation charges for the return of the product to Buyer will
be paid by MRC within the United States. For all other locations, Products Manufactured By Others:
the warranty excludes all costs of shipping, customs clearance, For products not manufactured by MRC, the original
and other related charges. If MRC determines that the product is manufacturer's or licensor's warranty will be assigned to Buyer to
not defective within the terms of this warranty, Buyer will pay the extent permitted by the manufacturer or licensor and is in lieu
MRC all costs of handling, transportation, and repairs at the then of any other warranty, expressed or implied. For warranty
prevailing repair rates. information on a specific product, a written request should be
d. All the above warranties are contingent upon proper use of made to MRC.
the product. These warranties will not apply (1) if adjustment,
repair, or product or parts replacement is required because of All Products:
accident, unusual physical, electrical or electromagnetic stress, THE FOREGOING WARRANTIES AND REMEDIES ARE
neglect, misuse, failure of electric power, environmental controls, EXCLUSIVE AND ARE IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER EXPRESS OR
transportation, failure to maintain properly or otherwise in IMPLIED WARRANTIES, OBLIGATIONS, AND LIABILITIES ON
accordance with MRC specifications, or abuses other than THE PART OF MRC. EXCEPT FOR THE EXPRESS
STRATA TX Technical Reference Manual iii

WARRANTIES STATED HEREIN, MRC DISCLAIMS ALL
WARRANTIES ON PRODUCTS FURNISHED HEREUNDER,
INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ALL IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. MRC WILL HAVE NO
RESPONSIBILITY FOR ANY PARTICULAR APPLICATION
MADE OF ANY EQUIPMENT.
Any description of equipment, whether in writing or made orally
by MRC or its agents, specification sheets, models, bulletins,
drawings, or similar materials used in connection with Buyer's
order are for the sole purpose of identifying the equipment and
will not be construed as an express warranty. Any suggestions
by MRC or its agents regarding use, application or suitability of
the equipment will not be construed as an express warranty. No
warranties may be implied from any course of dealing or usage
of trade. Buyer agrees that the exclusion of all warranties, other
than those expressly provided herein, is reasonable.
STRATA TX Technical Reference Manual iv

Contents Remote Control Options- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-3
Antenna and Power Options- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-3
Mounting and Deployment Options - - - - - - - - - - - 2-5
Notices - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - i System Integration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-6
About This Manual - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - i System Components - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-6
Copyright - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - i STRATA TXU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-6
Proprietary Material - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - i STRATA TCU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-7
Quality Certification - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - i STRATA HPU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-7
-------------------------------------- i STRATA ACU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-8
Regulatory Status- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - i STRATA Remote Control Panels - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-8
Conventions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ii TXU and TCU Configurations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-9
On-Line Viewing - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ii Typical System Configurations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-12
Symbols Used- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ii For More Information - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-12
Warranty Information - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - iii Routine Operation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-1
Product Manufactured by MRC: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - iii Chapter Overview - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-1
Products Manufactured By Others:- - - - - - - - - - - - - iii Overview of Controls, Indicators and Connectors - - - 3-2
All Products: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - iii TXU Controls, Indicators, and Connectors - - - - - - 3-2
Introduction - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-1 TCU Controls, Indicators, and Connectors - - - - - - 3-5
Chapter Overview - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-1 HPU Indicators and Connectors - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-9
What This Manual Covers - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-1 ACU Controls, Indicators, and Connectors- - - - - 3-10
How It’s Organized - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-1 STRATA Remote Control Panel Controls,
For Whom It’s Written - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-2 Indicators, and Connectors- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-11
Related Documents - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-2 STRATA Aircraft Remote Control Panel Controls,
Ordering Documentation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-2 Indicators, and Connectors- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-11
Calling for Service - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-2 Preparing for Operation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-11
Supported Repairs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-3 Mobile Installation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-11
Tell Us What You Think! - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-3 Portable Deployment - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-11
Powering the STRATA TX System - - - - - - - - - - 3-14
Product Description- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-1
Single TCU Power Up and Power Down - - - - - - 3-14
Chapter Overview - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-1
Single TXU Power up and Power Down- - - - - - - 3-15
System Description - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-1
TXU and TCU Power Up and Power Down -
System Options - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-2
Co-Located- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-16
Single Unit Systems - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-2
TXU and TCU Power Up and Power Down -
Multi-Unit Systems - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-3
Separate Locations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-18
STRATA TX Technical Reference Manual Contents-1

TXU and HPU Power Up and Power Down - - - - 3-20 STRATA TX Configurator- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-1
TXU, TCU, and HPU Power Up and Power Down - Settings - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-1
TXU and TCU Co-Located - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-22 System Rules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-1
TXU, TCU, and HPU Power Up and Power Down - Creating a Configuration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-2
TXU and TCU Separate Locations - - - - - - - - - - 3-24 Creating a New Configuration- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-2
Using the STRATA TX Screens - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-28 Loading a Configuration From a File - - - - - - - - - - 5-4
TXU and/or TCU Monitoring Operations - - - - - - - - 3-28 Loading a Configuration From the TX System - - - 5-6
Using the Monitor Screens in MPEG Output Mode 3-29 Saving the Configuration to a File - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-10
Using the Monitor Screens in Ext IF Input Mode 3-31 Programming a Configuration Into the TX System - - 5-11
Using the Monitor Screens in COFDM - IF Mode 3-32 Installation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-1
Using the Monitor Screens in COFDM ASI In Mode 3-33 Chapter Overview - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-1
Using the Monitor Screens in Analog - IF Mode- 3-34 Unpacking - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-1
Using the Monitor Screens in DVB-S Mode - - - - 3-35 Initial Inspection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-1
TXU and/or TCU Control Operations - - - - - - - - - - - 3-36 Damage in Shipment - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-1
Changing a Preset - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-38 Mounting and Cabling- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-2
Setting a Channel- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-39 Floor/Bulkhead Installation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-2
Setting Power Output - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-40 Tripod Deployment - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-3
Controlling TXU to HPU DC Power on Coax - - - 3-40 Power Connections - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-4
Controlling TXU to TCU DC Power on Coax - - - 3-41 Power Requirements - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-4
Front Panel vs. STRATA TX Configurator Settings - 3-43 Power Supply and Distribution - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-4
Troubleshooting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-1 Power Cable Assemblies - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-7
Chapter Overview - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-1 Additional Powering Notes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-9
Status LED - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-1 Grounding - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-9
Display Messages - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-2 Audio Connections - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-10
Error Codes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-3 Panel Connections - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-10
Primary Error Code- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-3 Audio Input - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-10
Error Status - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-10 Audio Configurations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-11
Unit ID - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-10 FMT Audio Input - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-11
Operational Problems - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-10 MPEG Audio Input- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-15
Advanced Operation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-1 AES/EBU Audio Input - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-15
Chapter Overview - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-1 TXU Audio and Video Connections - - - - - - - - - - 6-15
Before You Begin - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-1 TCU Audio and Video Connections - - - - - - - - - - 6-16
TX System - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-1 Signal Connections - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-20

Data Connections - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-21 Channels & Frequencies - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - A-1
Remote Control Panel- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-21 Appendix Overview - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - A-1
TXU and TCU Programming - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-21 Initial Factory Presets - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - A-1
Wayside Data - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-21 US 2 GHz Reallocation - 12 MHz Channel Plan - - - - A-2
Panel Data Connectors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-22 Glossary - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - B-1
Multipurpose Data Cable - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-23
Networking - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-23 Configurator Reference - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - C-1
Powering Up - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-27 Appendix Overview - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - C-1
Checks before power-up - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-27 Configurator Overview - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - C-1
Initial power-up- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-27 Working With the Configurator- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - C-1
Product Modifications - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-27 Tabs, Pages and Buttons - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - C-1
Repair - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-1 Progress Bars - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - C-3
Load and Program Options - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - C-4
Chapter Overview - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-1
Configurator Pages - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - C-6
Supported Repairs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-1
Main Page - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - C-6
Calling for Service - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-1
Radio Page- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - C-6
Replacement Parts- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-1 COFDM Page - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - C-8
Chapter Overview - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-1 MPEG Page - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - C-10
External Cables- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-1 FMT Page - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - C-13
Mounting Hardware - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-2 Channel Plan Page - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - C-14
Theory of Operation- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-1 Front Panel vs. Configurator - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - C-16
Chapter Overview - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-1 Configurator Troubleshooting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - C-16
System Architecture - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-1 Configurator Error Messages - - - - - - - - - - - - - - C-16
TCU Description - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-2 Configurator Operational Problems - - - - - - - - - - C-18
TXU Description - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-2 Installing the Configurator - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - C-21
HPU Description- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-2 PC Requirements - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - C-21
System Theory of Operation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-3 TX System Compatibility - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - C-22
Command and Control Power Supply- - - - - - - - - 9-3 STRATA TX System Compatibility - - - - - - - - - - C-22
MPEG/COFDM Encoder/Modulator Module - - - - 9-3
Specifications - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - D-1
FMT Module - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-4
TCU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-4
TXU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-4
HPU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-4

This page intentionally left blank.

1 Introduction 1.3 What This Manual Covers
This manual covers how to operate and maintain the STRATA
Transmitter (TX) System.
1.1 Chapter Overview
For information on Installation, Repair, Replacement Parts, and
This chapter will introduce you to the Technical Reference Theory of Operation, refer to the STRATA TX System Technical
Manual - what it covers, how it’s organized, and for whom it’s Reference Manual.
written.
This manual also covers various configurations of the STRATA
TX System. Your STRATA TX System will consist of one of the
1.2 How to Use This Manual following configurations:
This manual was prepared to be viewed on a Windows-based • A Standalone Transmitter Control Unit (TCU)
PC. A pdf file for this manual is provided on the CD ROM • A Standalone Transmitter Unit (TXU)
delivered with each STRATA Transmitter (TX) System. The CD
ROM contains pdf files for the Operator’s Guide, the Technical • A TCU and TXU
Reference Manual, and the Quick Reference Cards. Hardcopies • A TXU and High Power Unit (HPU)
of the Operator’s Guide, the Technical Reference Manual, and
the Quick Reference Cards are also delivered with each • A TXU, TCU, and HPU.
STRATA TX System. Your TX System may be mounted on a tripod or may be mounted
Viewing of this manual on-line requires Adobe Acrobat, Version in a vehicle or in an aircraft. Your TX System may also include an
4.0 or above. Click on the following icon to download your FREE optional MRC AC to DC Converter Unit (ACU).
copy of Adobe Acrobat Reader. If your system is mounted in a vehicle or in an aircraft, it may
also include an optional MRC Remote Control Panel or Aircraft
Remote Control Panel. This manual provides coverage for all of
these various configurations.
When viewing this manual on-line, text displayed as blue 1.4 How It’s Organized
contains a hypertext link. Click on the blue hypertext link to
jump to that destination. If the destination link is also blue, click The manuals for the STRATA TX System are organized as
on the blue destination link to return. follows:
STRATA TX Technical Reference Manual Introduction 1-1

Note The Technical Reference Manual contains
Technical everything in the Operator’s Guide, plus additional
Chapter Operator’s
Reference technical content.
Guide
Manual
Introduction
1.5 For Whom It’s Written
Product Description
This manual is intended for use by qualified installers and
service personnel. Users of this manual should already be
Routine Operation
familiar with the fundamentals of radio, video, and audio.
Troubleshooting
1.6 Related Documents
Advanced Operation
• STRATA TX System Operator’s Guide
(part no. 400501-1)
Installation
• STRATA TX System Quick Reference Card
Repair (part no. 400503-1)
• STRATA Aircraft Remote Control Panel Operator’s Guide
Replacement Parts (part no. 400490)
Theory of Operation • STRATA Remote Control Panel Operator’s Guide
(part no. 400489)
Appendix A - Channels
& Frequencies 1.7 Ordering Documentation
Appendix B - Glossary
Any of the above manuals may be ordered by contacting MRC
Appendix C - Customer Service:
Configurator Reference Business Hours: Monday - Thursday
Specifications
8:00 AM - 7:00 PM Eastern Time (US)
(0800 - 1900 hrs US ET)

Friday (0800 - 1900 hrs US ET)
8:00 AM - 5:00 PM Eastern Time (US) Telephone: 800-490-5700 (Press 4)
(0800 - 1700 hrs US ET) 978-671-5700 (Press 4)
Telephone: 800-490-5700 (Press 3) Fax: 978-671-5800
978-671-5700 (Press 3) E-mail: [email protected]
Fax: 978-671-5800 After regular business hours and on weekends and holidays, you
E-mail [email protected] can also reach our expert staff as follows:
When contacting Customer Service, please have the following Telephone: 978-671-5929
information available:
• Model number and serial number of the unit. This is Your call will be automatically forwarded to the on-call Technical
located on a label on the bottom of each unit. Support specialist.
• Approximate purchase date.

• Radio version, which appears on the TXU or TCU When contacting Technical Support, please have the following
alphanumeric display at startup. information available:
or • Model number and serial number of the unit. This is

located on a label on the bottom of each unit.
• Firmware versions displayed on the Main page of the
STRATA TX Configuration Utility, when the STRATA TX • Approximate purchase date.
Configuration Utility is connected to the TXU or TCU. • Radio version, which appears on the TXU or TCU
alphanumeric display at startup.
or
1.8 Calling for Service • Firmware versions displayed on the Main page of the
STRATA TX Configuration Utility, when the STRATA TX
MRC Technical Support is available 24 hours a day, 7 days a Configuration Utility is connected to the TXU or TCU.
week. During regular business hours you can reach our expert
staff directly.
Business Hours: Monday - Friday
8:00 AM - 7:00PM Eastern Time (US)

1.9 Supported Repairs Be sure to tell us what product you’re writing about, and which
manual - the Operator’s Guide, the Quick Reference Card, or the
The STRATA TX System, including the TXU, TCU, HPU, and Technical Reference Manual.
optional ACU, is designed to be compact, rugged and reliable.
The TXU, TCU, and HPU require specialized test equipment to
calibrate amplitude and frequency characteristics after repair. In
addition, sealing the TXU, TCU, HPU, or optional ACU
enclosures after repair requires exacting techniques and special
fixtures to ensure weather resistance of the units.
Therefore, there are NO supported field repairs to either the
TXU, TCU, HPU, or ACU.
Return the entire unit for factory repair.
If you attempt field repair, you risk damaging your
equipment. If your equipment is under warranty, you may also
affect your warranty coverage.
1.10 Tell Us What You Think!

We’d appreciate any comments or suggestions you have about
this manual. The more feedback we get, the better the manuals
get!
If you’re viewing this manual electronically, it’s easy - just click on
the link below send us an E-mail.
Feedback
Or, you can E-mail our Technical Support team at:

[email protected]

2 Product Description 2.2 System Description
The STRATA TX System is a highly reliable, flexible, and
compact portable microwave transmitter system ideal for tripod,
2.1 Chapter Overview airborne, or mobile installations. A typical STRATA TX System is
This chapter provides an overall description of the STRATA TX composed of the Transmitter Unit (TXU), the Transmitter Control
System, its components, and its capabilities. Unit (TCU), and the Transmitter High Power Unit (HPU), as
shown in Figure 2-1 on page 2-2. This modular architecture
Here are the topics covered:
allows you the maximum flexibility in configuration, siting, and
operation.
Topic Page The STRATA TX System key features are:
System Description 2-1 • Analog, Digital, or Analog/Digital Switchable
System Options 2-2 • MPEG Encoding (4:2:0, 4:2:2)
Single Unit Systems 2-2 • COFDM Modulation with Forward Error Correction and
Multi-Unit Systems 2-3 Selectable Guard Band Interval
Remote Control Options 2-3 • Digital Modulation for QPSK, 16 QAM, and 64 QAM
Antenna and Power Options 2-3 • NTSC or PAL Modulation with Audio (4 mono or 2 stereo)
Mounting and Deployment Options 2-5 • Tripod, Half Rack, or Full Rack Mounts
System Integration 2-6
• Front Panel Local Control
System Components 2-6
• Remote Control
STRATA TXU 2-6
• Two Bands from 1.9 to 2.5 GHz and 2.3 to 2.7 GHz.
STRATA TCU 2-7
STRATA HPU 2-7
STRATA ACU 2-8
STRATA Remote Control Panels 2-8
TXU and TCU Configurations 2-9
Typical System Configurations 2-12
For More Information 2-12
STRATA TX Operator’s Guide/Tech Ref Manual Product Description 2-1

Figure 2-1: STRATA TX System Block Diagram
1.84 MHz OOK Tone
Telemetry Telemetry
NTSC
PAL SIGNAL RF/DC
SDI IN TCU TXU HPU RF OUT
ASI
IF
DC Power and/or IF
RS-232 +10.5 to +48 VDC RS-232 +10.5 to +48 VDC
The STRATA TX System TXU and the TCU may be operated in HPU The High Power Unit (HPU) is used with the TXU to
stand-alone configurations depending upon specific video increase output power. The HPU is only used in conjunction with
applications. The HPU is used only in conjunction with a TXU. a TXU.
ACU The optional AC to DC Power Converter (ACU) provides
2.2.1 System Options DC power from an AC power source to power one or more units
The STRATA TX System can be ordered configured for one of two in a system.
specific 2 GHz RF bands. MRC is constantly working to expand Remote Control Panels Optional Remote Control Panels are
and upgrade the capabilities of the STRATA TX System. Consult available to allow remote control of the STRATA TX System from
your Sales Representative or contact the factory for the latest an instrument panel during airborne or mobile operations.
band availability.
The STRATA TX System (typically) consists of the following 2.2.2 Single Unit Systems
components: The TXU or TCU may be used independently as single-unit
TXU The Transmitter Unit (TXU) can be equipped with either an applications as follows:
FM Modulator or COFDM/MPEG module, but not both.
• The TXU may be used as a stand-alone transmitter
TCU The Transmitter Control Unit (TCU) can be equipped with accepting an IF input.
either an FM Modulator or COFDM/MPEG module, or both.

• The TXU may be used as a stand-alone transmitter source.
featuring FMT modulation or MPEG and COFDM.
Antenna Options The STRATA TX System is fully compatible
• The TCU may be used as a stand-alone unit used for with the MRC family of transmit antennas, including:
FMT modulation or MPEG and COFDM, or both FMT
• OmniPole omnidirectional
modulation and MPEG and COFDM.
• Megahorn compact horn
2.2.3 Multi-Unit Systems • SectorScan flat panel
The TXU, TCU, and HPU can be configured as part of an • MicroScan parabolic
integrated system as follows:
• Ellipse parabolic
• The TCU may contain the FMT modulator and MPEG/
COFDM module supplying an IF signal to a TXU Contact your Sales Representative to explore the wide array of
containing only the RF transmitter. antenna choices available.
• The TXU may contain the RF modulator or MPEG/ Power Options The latest STRATA TX System configurations
COFDM module supplying an RF signal to the HPU, re- operate on DC power, supplied externally, from +10.5 VDC to
transmitting the signal at a higher output level, or directly +36 VDC. Older configurations were available that operated on
to the transmitter antenna. DC power ranging from +10.5 to +48 VDC. This DC power can
be supplied by the optional STRATA ACU, or from another DC
• The TCU can be separated from the TXU in applications power source.
where the transmitter needs to be placed in another
location. This manual covers both the latest and older TX System DC
power configurations and requirements. Contact your Sales
2.2.4 Remote Control Options Representative for the latest information.
For portable mobile or airborne operations, the STRATA TX

System may be controlled by one of two models of Remote Note A TCU and TXU are defined as being co-located
Control Panels. The Remote Control Panels are mounted in when the TXU and TCU are physically separated
mobile racks or aircraft instrument panels and are connected via by not greater than 6 feet.
an RS-232 cable between the Remote Control Panel and the
STRATA TX System. If the TXU and TCU are co-located, power must be supplied to
each unit through their individual power connectors from the
2.2.5 Antenna and Power Options same power source. See Figure 2-2 on page 2-4. Do not use
DC on coax to power the TXU or TCU when the units are co-
The flexible architecture of the STRATA TX System allows a located.
number of options for both the transmit antenna and DC power

If the STRATA TX System contains an HPU, the HPU is powered additional information.
by DC superimposed on the coaxial cable between the TXU and
the HPU. Figure 2-3: Powering the TXU from the TCU
Coax
Figure 2-2: Powering the TXU and TCU Independently STRATA STRATA
TXU TCU
STRATA STRATA STRATA Up to 600 ft.
Coax Power
HPU Coax TXU TCU (180 m)
Cable
Branched
Power Cable STRATA DC Power (+28 V to +48 V)
HPU
DC Power (+10.5 V to +48 V)
Figure 2-4: Powering the TCU from the TXU
If your installation calls for separating the TXU and TCU, the Coax
TXU is powered by DC supplied by the TCU or the TCU is STRATA STRATA
powered by DC supplied by the TXU. The DC power is TXU TCU
superimposed on the coaxial cable connected between the units. Up to 600 ft.
Coax Power
See Figure 2-3 and Figure 2-4. (180 m)
Cable
If your STRATA TX System contains an HPU, the HPU is
powered by DC supplied from the TXU via the coaxial cable
between the units. The TXU can only supply DC power to the STRATA DC Power (+28 V to
HPU superimposed on the coaxial cable between the TXU and HPU +48 V)
HPU when the TX System is in the transmit mode.
The DC input voltage to the unit co-located with the DC power
DC power superimposed on the coaxial cable between a TCU
supply must be greater than +24 VDC.
and a TXU can be supplied from either the TCU or TXU,
For those applications that use a TCU in a standalone mode, i.e., depending upon the location of the DC power supply.
to generate ASI or DVB-S signals, DC power from the TCU to
Coaxial cable length/voltage limitations exist when powering
the TXU or from the TXU to the TCU cannot be used.
from either the TXU or TCU. These limitations are based on
Refer to the “Installation” Chapter on page 6-1 (part of the cable size, DC voltage input, cable resistance, and cable length.
STRATA TX System Technical Reference Manual only) for A maximum length of 600 feet (180 meters) between the TXU

and TCU is supported. Contact MRC Technical Support for more .
information on cable requirements.
Table 2-1: HPU Input Voltage Requirements
DC power required for a STRATA TX System depends upon the
TX System configuration, i.e., if the system contains an HPU, if Part Number Input Voltage Range
the TXU or TCU are operated in a standalone mode, if the TXU 907233-01 +10 to +20 VDC
and TCU are co-located, or if the TXU and TCU are mounted in 907233-02 +10 to +20 VDC
separate locations. See Figure 2-16 on page 2-14 for the 907233-11 +21 to +56 VDC (Older
various STRATA TX System configurations available. Configurations)
The STRATA ACU has been available in three configurations, 907233-12 +21 to +56 VDC (Older
with each configuration having a different output voltage level as Configurations)
follows: 907233-21 +10 to +36 VDC
• +15 VDC 907233-22 +10 to +36 VDC
• +28 VDC
2.2.6 Mounting and Deployment Options
• +48 VDC (Older Configurations)
The STRATA TX System offers a number of options for either
Figure 2-15 on page 2-13 illustrates the ACU output voltage mobile or portable applications.
levels for each of the TX System configurations. For TX
Systems that use DC power sources other than a STRATA ACU, For more details on installation of the STRATA TX System in
contact MRC Technical Support for additional power source various applications, see the “Installation” Chapter on page 6-1
information. (part of the STRATA TX System Technical Reference Manual
only).
DC power requirements vary for a TX System consisting of a
TCU, TXU, and an HPU with the TCU and TXU mounted in Mobile Installation For mobile applications such as in a vehicle
separate locations based on the location of the DC power source or in an aircraft, the STRATA TX System is usually mounted in an
and the length of the coaxial cable between the two units. MRC fixed mounting bracket and is installed in a bulkhead or
compartment. The cabling is permanently installed and power
Power requirements will also vary for a TX System containing an comes from aircraft or vehicle power.
HPU. Six different configurations of HPUs have been delivered,
with each configuration having a different DC input voltage Portable Deployment In portable applications the STRATA TX
requirement. The DC input voltage requirements may be System will be moved from place to place and set up each time.
determined by looking at the part number of the HPU marked on The TXU, TCU, and HPU will usually be mounted in a MRC
the unit label. Operating voltage ranges for each of the HPU universal mounting bracket. The bracket is attached to a tripod
configurations are shown in Table 2-1. using a mounting plate and quick release.
The cabling between TXU, TCU, and HPU is typically left in

place and the power, antenna, and audio/video connections are factory default settings. The STRATA TX Configuration Utility
removed at the end of each deployment. software automatically detects what hardware is installed in the
system and assigns the appropriate configuration to the correct
2.2.7 System Integration hardware, regardless of which unit holds the hardware being
configured.
System Communication When the TXU and TCU are
connected, they automatically communicate via signals
superimposed on the coaxial cable between the two units. This 2.3 System Components
allows them to share information on installed hardware, preset
This section will provide more details about each the
configurations, current status, and alarms.
components of a STRATA TX System:
System Operation Once the TXU and TCU are connected and
communicating, the units work seamlessly together. System • STRATA TXU
settings can be selected and modified from the front panel of • STRATA TCU
either unit, regardless of which unit holds the hardware being • STRATA HPU
configured.
• STRATA ACU
System Configuration The STRATA TX System offers two
levels of system configuration, designed to match the needs of • STRATA Remote Control Panels
different personnel. For details on connections between the STRATA TX System
For the field operator, the STRATA TX System has up to 9 components, refer to the “Installation” chapter (part of the
Presets that can be selected from the front panel. Each Preset STRATA TX System Technical Reference Manual only).
controls key parameters such as modulation, frequency, and
audio and video settings. Additional settings that are front panel- 2.3.1 STRATA TXU
controlled include band, channel, offset, and filtering. The TXU (Figure 2-5 on page 2-7) always contains an IF/RF
For the advanced operator and technical staff, the STRATA TX module that accepts either a 70 MHz COFDM, FMT IF, or
Configuration Utility software allows complete control of all external 70 MHz input signal and up-converts these signals to
parameters in the STRATA TX System. The STRATA TX the required RF band. The RF frequency synthesizer circuit
Configuration Utility software runs on a Windows-based PC and included in the IF/RF unit, in conjunction with the command and
connects to either the TXU or the TCU via an RS-232 serial control power supply module, provides the means to channelize
interface cable. RF video and audio signals in the 2 GHz RF band.
Interfacing a PC to either the TXU or TCU in a connected system Standard U.S. FCC band plans, as well as customer-created
gives you complete control of both units. You can read the channel plans, may be customized using the STRATA TX
current settings, program new settings, or return the units to their Configuration Utility software.

As noted previously, the TXU may also include either an MPEG/ A TCU may also consist of a stand-alone configuration whereby
CODFM or FMT module (but not both), in which case the TXU either or both MPEG/COFDM and FMT modules may be used
serves as a stand-alone digital or analog video microwave independent of the TXU. This configuration permits use of a
transmission system. TCU equipped with analog and/or digital video modulation
modules for a variety of signal input and output configurations,
including a digital option using NTSC or PAL composite video
input and ASI (digital) signal output.
Figure 2-5: STRATA TXU
Figure 2-6: STRATA TCU
2.3.2 STRATA TCU

The TCU (Figure 2-6) may contain either analog or digital or both 2.3.3 STRATA HPU
analog and digital video modulation modules. Where an The optional HPU (Figure 2-7 on page 2-8) is designed to
application might initially employ only analog video transmission operate with a companion TXU. RF output signals from the TXU
but expects to migrate to dual, switchable, analog and digital are connected, via coaxial cable, to the HPU RF IN connector.
operation, the TCU may be upgraded to add the MPEG/COFDM
The HPU installs as part of an integrated stack for either tripod or
module to add this capability.
aircraft/mobile applications. The HPU is always powered from
Where only digital or analog video transmission is desired, the the TXU.
MPEG/COFDM or FMT modules may be installed in a TXU,
In analog transmission, the RF output signal from the TXU is
thereby eliminating the need for a TCU. The STRATA TX
amplified, operating the HPU RF amplifier in the non-linear
System design does not permit splitting digital and analog video
region (saturated), providing RF output levels at the 12 watt level
modulator modules between a TXU and a TCU.
(+41 dBm).

When COFDM RF signals are used, software controlled back-off supply DC power directly to the applicable unit. In the case
attenuation is applied to operate the HPU RF amplifier in the where a TXU and a TCU are co-located, both the TXU and TCU
linear region. These back-off levels are carefully measured and should be powered directly from the ACU in lieu of supplying DC
configured at the factory to ensure digital mode RF output power from the TCU to the TXU or from the TXU to the TCU via
signals provide optimum performance. the coaxial cable connected between the units.
Figure 2-7: STRATA HPU Figure 2-8: STRATA ACU
< >
DC
OUTPUT
2.3.4 STRATA ACU

2.3.5 STRATA Remote Control Panels
For fixed or portable deployment applications, the STRATA TX
System may be powered by the optional AC to DC Converter For mobile or airborne operations, two Remote Control Panel
(ACU). The ACU (Figure 2-8) is offered in several different models are currently available. Contact your Sales
models, each featuring different voltage output levels. Representative for the latest information.
The ACU installs as part of an integrated stack for either tripod or Both Remote Control Panel models provide simplified transmit
fixed applications. The ACU may be used to power only the TXU operations by allowing the operator or pilot to select either
or TCU when the TXU and TCU are not co-located. In this case, analog or digital pre-configured Presets, Channels, and Offsets,
the TXU would receive DC power from the TCU or the TCU depending upon the required operating mode.
would receive DC power from the TXU superimposed on the Standard Remote Control Panel The standard STRATA
coaxial cable connected between the units. Remote Control Panel (Figure 2-9 on page 2-9) provides
In standalone TXU or TCU operations, the ACU may be used to instrument panel remote control of the STRATA TX System for

mobile operations and features 9 selectable Presets. Figure 2-10: Aircraft Remote Control Panel
For additional information, refer to the STRATA Remote Control
Panel Operator’s Guide (part no. 400489).
Figure 2-9: Standard Remote Control Panel
Aircraft Remote Control Panel The STRATA Aircraft Remote 2.4 TXU and TCU Configurations
Control Panel (Figure 2-10) is a simplified version of the
standard STRATA Remote Control Panel. This panel provides TXU Several different configurations of the TXU exist as the
instrument panel remote control of the STRATA TX System for result of technical updates. The different configurations are
airborne operations. This model features only two Presets for described below.
ease of operation.
TXU - Older Configuration If your TXU is an older
The unit is designed to fit a standard aircraft instrument panel configuration, the controls and connectors contained on the TXU
and provides user-friendly controls, combined with well placed are similar to those shown in Figure 2-11 on page 2-10. Older
and easy to read LED displays and color indicators. configurations do not contain a DC ON COAX switch to provide
For additional information, refer to the STRATA Aircraft Remote manual control of DC power to the HPU.
Control Panel Operator’s Guide (part no. 400490). The AUDIO connector located on the front panel is present if the
TXU was ordered to operate without a TCU. If the TXU was
ordered to operate with a TCU, the AUDIO connector is replaced
by a blank cover.

TXU - Newer Configuration If your TXU is a newer Figure 2-12: TXU - Newer Configuration
configuration, the controls and connectors contained on the TXU
are similar to those shown in Figure 2-12. A DC ON COAX SIGNAL INPUT TX TXU
TXU XMIT
PWR/RS-485
switch will be located on the rear of the TXU to allow manual

control of DC power to the HPU.
Figure 2-11: TXU - Older Configuration

Front View
Audio SIGNAL INPUT PWR/RS-485 PWR/RS-485
DC ON COAX SIGNAL INPUT
Connector Connector Connector Connector
Override Switch Connector
TX PWR/RS-485
RF Output RS-232
SIGNAL INPUT TXU
TXU XMIT
Connector Connector
Front View
RF Output RS-232
Connector Connector
Rear View
TCU Several different configurations of the TCU also exist as

the result of technical updates. Configuration differences are
described below.
Rear View
TCU - Older Configuration If your TCU is an older
configuration, the controls and connectors contained on the TCU
If your TXU is equipped with either the FMT modulator or the are similar to those shown in Figure 2-13 on page 2-11. Older
MPEG/COFDM module and your TXU was ordered to operate configurations do not contain the front panel DC ON COAX
without a TCU, the front panel contains an AUDIO connector in switch to provide manual control of DC power to a TXU.
place of the DC ON COAX switch.
If your TXU was ordered to operate with a TCU, a DC ON COAX
switch will be located on the front panel to allow manual control
of DC power to the TXU from the TCU.

Figure 2-13: TCU - Older Configuration Figure 2-14: TCU - Newer Configuration
TX TCU XMIT TX TCU

XMIT
Front View
RS-232 Front View
Connector RS-232 DC ON COAX
Connector Override Switch
POWER SIGNAL OUT Monitor (MON) AUDIO

POWER SIGNAL OUT Monitor (MON) AUDIO
SIGNAL IN
Rear View Connector
Rear View SIGNAL IN

TCU - Newer Configuration If your TCU is the newer Connector
configuration, the controls and connectors contained on the TCU
are similar to those shown in Figure 2-14. A DC ON COAX
switch is located on the front panel to provide manual control of
DC power to a TXU.

2.5 Typical System Configurations
Typical STRATA TX System configurations are shown in
Figure 2-15 on page 2-13.
2.6 For More Information

Additional detailed technical information about the STRATA TX
System is contained in the STRATA TX System Technical
Reference Manual only. Specific topics contained in the
Technical Reference Manual are listed below:
Topic Chapter
Changing settings using See Chapter 5, “Advanced
the Configurator software Operation”
Installation See Chapter 6, “Installation”
Connections to other See Chapter 6, “Installation”
equipment
Supported Repairs See Chapter 7, “Repair”
Repair Parts See Chapter 8, “Replacement
Parts”
Block Diagram See Chapter 9, “Theory of
Operation”

Figure 2-15: STRATA TX System Configurations

Figure 2-16: STRATA TX System Options
70 MHz IF Output Only TXU HPU

RF/IF Only (OPTIONAL)
NTSC or PAL Analog Video TXU HPU

with 4 Audio Channels Available FMT Option (OPTIONAL)
SDI, ASI, NTSC or PAL TXU HPU

& Digitial/Analog Audio COFDM / MPEG (OPTIONAL)
Option
1.9 to 2.5 GHz
or 2.3 to 2.7 GHz
RF Output
SDI, ASI, NTSC or PAL TCU TXU HPU
& Digitial/Analog Audio COFDM / MPEG RF/IF Only (OPTIONAL)
& FMT Monitor
Analog Video or TXU HPU

Digital Video + Audio
TCU
COFDM / MPEG RF/IF Only (OPTIONAL)
Monitor
NTSC or PAL Analog

Video with 4 Audio TCU TXU HPU
UXR
RF/IF Only
UXR
(OPTIONAL)
Channels Available FMT Only

3 Routine Operation TXU and HPU Power Up and Power
Down
3-21
3.1 Chapter Overview TXU, TCU, and HPU Power Up and 3-22
Power Down - TXU and TCU Co-
This chapter provides basic information that will enable you to Located
operate your STRATA TX System. TXU, TCU, and HPU Power Up and 3-24
Here are the topics covered: Power Down - TXU and TCU Separate
Locations
Topic Page Using the STRATA TX Screens 3-27
Overview of Controls, Indicators and 3-2 TXU and/or TCU Monitoring Operations 3-28
Connectors Using the Monitor Screens in MPEG IF 3-28
TXU Controls, Indicators, and 3-2 Out Mode
Connectors Using the Monitor Screens in MPEG 3-30
TCU Controls, Indicators, and 3-5 ASI Out Mode
Connectors Using the Monitor Screens in COFDM 3-31
HPU Indicators and Connectors 3-9 ASI In Mode
ACU Controls, Indicators, and 3-10 Using the Monitor Screens in Ext. IF In 3-32
Connectors Mode
STRATA Remote Control Panel 3-11 Using the Monitor Screens in Analog IF 3-33
Controls, Indicators, and Connectors Mode
STRATA Aircraft Remote Control Panel 3-11 Using the Monitor Screens in DVB- 3-34
Controls, Indicators, and Connectors Satellite Mode
Preparing for Operation 3-11 TXU and/or TCU Control Operations 3-35
Mobile Installation 3-11 Changing a Preset 3-37
Portable Deployment 3-11 Setting a Channel 3-38
Powering the STRATA TX System 3-14 Setting Power Output 3-39
Single TCU Power Up and Power Down 3-14 Controlling TXU to HPU DC Power on 3-39
Single TXU Power up and Power Down 3-15 Coax
TXU and TCU Power Up and Power 3-17 Controlling TXU to TCU DC Power on 3-40
Down - Co-Located Coax
TXU and TCU Power Up and Power 3-18 Front Panel vs. STRATA TX Configurator 3-42
Down - Separate Locations Settings
STRATA TX Operator’s Guide/Tech Ref Manual Routine Operation 3-1

Information on settings made with the STRATA TX Configuration
TXU RF Output Connector 3-5
Utility software can be found in the “Advanced Operation”
Chapter on page 5-1 (part of the STRATA TX System Technical TXU RS-232 Connector 3-5
Reference Manual only). Each of these controls, indicators, and connectors are described
For a summary of settings that can be made with the TXU and in more detail in the following paragraphs. Controls, indicators,
TCU front panel control switches and which settings are made and connectors contained on the TXU are shown in Figure 3-1.
using the STRATA TX Configuration Utility, see Section 3.7 on For configuration differences in the TXU, see “TXU and TCU
page 3-42. Configurations” on page 2-9.
The TXU is configured using Windows PC-based STRATA TX
3.2 Overview of Controls, Indicators Configuration Utility software. For details, see the “Advanced
Operation” Chapter on page 5-1 (part of the STRATA TX System
and Connectors Technical Reference Manual only).
This section describes the controls, indicators, and connectors
used on the STRATA TX System. Figure 3-1: TXU Controls, Indicators, and Connectors
INPUT Alphanumeric XMIT Status
Connector Display LED
3.2.1 TXU Controls, Indicators, and Connectors LED
Controls, indicators, and connectors contained on the TXU are

identified and described below. Topics covered are as follows: SIGNAL INPUT TX TXU
TXU XMIT
PWR/RS-485
Topic Page
TXU Front Panel DC ON COAX 3-3
Switch DC ON COAX (Front View)
TXU SIGNAL INPUT Connector 3-3 Switch or AUDIO
Control Power PWR/RS-485
Connector RF Output
TXU AUDIO Connector 3-3 Switch Switch Connector
DC ON COAX Connector
TXU Alphanumeric Display 3-3 RS-232
Switch Connector
TXU XMIT LED 3-3
TXU Status LED 3-3
TXU PWR/RS-485 Connector 3-4
TXU PWR Switch 3-4
TXU Control Switch 3-4
TXU Rear Panel DC ON COAX 3-5 (Rear View)
Switch

TXU Front Panel DC ON COAX Switch DC ON COAX TXU AUDIO Connector AUDIO connectors are not contained
switches are not contained on all configurations of the TXU. For on all configurations of the TXU. For configuration differences,
configuration differences, see Section 2.4 on page 2-9. see Section 2.4 on page 2-9.
If your STRATA TX System contains both a TXU and a TCU, the If your TXU contains an AUDIO connector, all audio inputs are
System allows you to power the TXU using DC power supplied applied to the front panel mounted 10-pin connector.
from the TCU or allows you to power the TCU using DC power
TXU Alphanumeric Display The TXU contains a two-line by
from the TXU. This DC power is superimposed on the coaxial
12-character alphanumeric display. The display works in
cable between the TCU and the TXU. This DC power option is
conjunction with the control switch to allow you to monitor
used when the TCU and the TXU must be deployed in two
system status and to control system settings.
separate locations.
TXU XMIT LED When the TXU control switch is pressed for one
When the TCU and TXU are co-located, MRC recommends both
second, the transmitter changes from the standby mode to the
units be powered from the same DC power source.
transmit mode or from the transmit mode to the standby mode.
If your STRATA TX System does not contain a TCU, the DC ON When the transmitter is in the transmit mode, the XMIT LED
COAX switch may not be present. If the switch is present, it illuminates blue. When the transmitter is in the standby mode,
should be set to the OFF position if no TCU is present. the XMIT LED is off.
If your STRATA TX System contains both a TXU and a TCU, the If your STRATA TX System contains both a TXU and a TCU,
System gives you several ways to control DC power on the pressing the Control switch on either the TXU or TCU will
coaxial cable between the TCU and the TXU, depending on the change the transmitter to the transmit mode or to the standby
configurations of your TCU and TXU: mode. The XMIT LED on both units will be on or off, depending
• The DC ON COAX switch on the front panel of the TCU on the operating mode.
(See Figure 3-2 on page 3-6) and the DC ON COAX TXU Status LED Above the PWR switch on both the TXU and
switch on the front panel of the TXU (Figure 3-1 on TCU is a multi-color Status LED. The LED indications are as
page 3-2). follows:
• The 75 Ohm Coax option on the Command Screen. LED Color Meaning
Both control methods must be enabled for DC power to be ----- Power is not on in that unit.
operational if your TCU and TXU configurations contain the DC
Green Power is on and no errors are detected.
ON COAX switches. If DC ON COAX switches are not present
on your TCU and TXU, DC power can only be applied using the Amber Alarm - Power is on but some part of the
system reports an abnormal condition
75 Ohm Coax option on the command screen.
that might impair performance.
TXU SIGNAL INPUT Connector The BNC INPUT connector
provides the IF or video input to the TXU.

Red Major Alarm - Power is on but there is a Turning the control switch to the left (ccw)
failure or error that prevents normal displays the Command options.
operation. The Command options allow control of the
STRATA TX System, including:
WARNING A Major Alarm may also indicate a potential • Changing the Preset
safety hazard. Shut down the STRATA TX
System and disconnect power. • Setting the RF Channel
• Set Power Output
• Select No HPU or HPU Present (Turns
TXU PWR/RS-485 Connector The TXU PWR/RS-485
power from TXU to HPU on or off)
connector mounted on the front panel of the unit allows the TXU
to operate on external power sources from +10.5 VDC to +48 • Select 75 Ohm Coax Power On or Power
VDC. Off (Turns power from TCU to TXU or TXU to
TCU on or off if DC power is superimposed on
TXU PWR Switch The front panel PWR (power) switch controls the coaxial cable between the TCU and the
application of DC power to the TXU. If your STRATA TX System TXU).
contains both a TXU and an TCU, both PWR switches must be
turned on for the system to function.
TXU Control Switch Routine operating settings are controlled
by the control switch. Turning the control switch right (cw) or left
(ccw) displays status and settings and pressing it in makes
selections, as described below:
Turning the control switch to the right (cw)
displays the Monitor options.
The Monitor options provide current status
of the STRATA TX System, including:
• Frequency Settings
• Mode - Analog or Digital
• Audio Settings
• Video Settings
• System Errors.

Pressing the control switch causes an Both control methods must be enabled for this DC power to be
action to occur. operational if your TXU configuration contains the DC ON COAX
switch. If the DC ON COAX switch is not present on your TXU,
Command Options DC power can only be applied using the HPU Coax option on the
• If the displayed setting is Chng Preset, Set command screen.
Channel, or Set PowerOut, pressing the TXU RF Output Connector The RF output connector is a type
control switch causes the displayed setting to
N connector that allows connection to either an antenna or to an
blink.
HPU.
Turning the control switch cw or ccw then
displays the other options for that setting. TXU RS-232 Connector The RS-232 connector provides
When the desired option is displayed, connection to a Windows-based PC when using the STRATA TX
pressing the control switch selects that Configuration Utility software.
option.
This connector also provides connection to the Standard or
• If the displayed setting is HPU Coax or 75
Aircraft Remote Control Panel when used in mobile or aircraft
Ohm Coax, pressing the control switch
operations.
causes the setting to switch to the other
choice (i.e., if 75 Ohm Coax Power Off is
displayed, pressing the control switch will 3.2.2 TCU Controls, Indicators, and Connectors
select 75 Ohm Coax Power On). Controls, indicators, and connectors contained on the TCU are
Transmit identified and described below. Topics covered are as follows:
• Pressing the control switch for one second
changes the transmitter to the transmit mode Topic Page
from the standby mode. TCU Alphanumeric Display 3-6
• Pressing the control switch for one second TCU XMIT LED 3-6
changes the transmitter from the transmit TCU Status LED 3-6
mode to the standby mode.
TCU PWR Switch 3-7
TXU Rear Panel DC ON COAX Switch The STRATA TX TCU DC ON COAX Switch 3-7
System provides several ways to power the HPU from the TXU
TCU Control Switch 3-7
using DC power supplied from the TXU, depending on the
configuration of your TXU. This DC power is superimposed on TCU RS-232 Connector 3-8
the coaxial cable connected between the TXU and the HPU: TCU POWER Connector 3-9
• The DC ON COAX switch on the rear panel of the TXU TCU SIGNAL OUT Connector 3-9
TCU Monitor (MON) Connector 3-9
• The HPU Coax option on the Command Screen.

TCU SIGNAL IN Connector 3-9 Figure 3-2: TCU Controls, Indicators, and Connectors
Alphanumeric XMIT Status PWR
TCU AUDIO Connector 3-9 LED
Display LED Switch
Each of these controls, indicators, and connectors are described
in the following paragraphs. Controls, indicators, and connectors
contained on the TCU are shown in Figure 3-2. For configuration TX TCU
XMIT
differences in the TCU, see “TXU and TCU Configurations” on

page 2-9.
The TCU is configured using Windows PC-based STRATA TX
Configuration Utility software. For details, see the “Advanced (Front View)
RS-232 Control DC ON COAX
Operation” Chapter on page 5-1 (part of the STRATA TX System Connector Switch Switch
Technical Reference Manual only).
POWER SIGNAL OUT Monitor (MON)
TCU Alphanumeric Display The TCU contains a two-line by Connector Connector Connector
12-character alphanumeric display. The display works in
conjunction with the control switch to allow you to monitor
system status and to control system settings.
TCU XMIT LED When the TCU control switch is pressed for one
second, the transmitter changes from the standby mode to the
transmit mode or from the transmit mode to the standby mode.
When the transmitter is in the transmit mode, the XMIT LED (Rear View) SIGNAL IN AUDIO
illuminates blue. When the transmitter is in the standby mode, Connector Connector
the XMIT LED is off.
If your STRATA TX System contains both a TXU and a TCU, TCU Status LED Above the PWR switch on both the TXU and
pressing the Control switch on either the TXU or TCU will TCU is a multi-color Status LED. The LED indications are as
change the transmitter to the transmit mode or to the standby follows:
mode. The XMIT LED on both units will be on or off, depending
on the operating mode. LED Color Meaning
----- Power is not on in that unit.
Green Power is on and no errors are detected.
Amber Alarm - Power is on but some part of the
system reports an abnormal condition
that might impair performance.

Red Major Alarm - Power is on but there is a • The DC ON COAX switch on the front panel of the TCU
failure or error that prevents normal (See Figure 3-2 on page 3-6) and the DC ON COAX
operation. switch on the front panel of the TXU (See Figure 3-1 on
page 3-2).
• The 75 Ohm Coax option on the Command Screen.
WARNING A Major Alarm may also indicate a potential
safety hazard. Shut down the STRATA TX Both control methods must be enabled for DC power to be
System and disconnect power. operational if your TCU and TXU configurations contain the DC
ON COAX switches. If DC ON COAX switches are not present
on your TCU and TXU, DC power can only be applied using the
TCU PWR Switch The front panel PWR (power) switch controls
75 Ohm Coax option on the command screen.
application of DC power to the TCU. If your STRATA TX System
contains both a TXU and an TCU, both PWR switches must be TCU Control Switch Routine operating settings are controlled
turned on for the system to function. by the control switch. Turning the control switch right (cw) or left
(ccw) displays status and settings and pressing it in makes
TCU DC ON COAX Switch DC ON COAX switches are not
selections, as described below:
contained on all configurations of the TCU. For configuration
differences, see “TXU and TCU Configurations” on page 2-9. Turning the control switch to the right (cw)
displays the Monitor options.
If your STRATA TX System contains both a TXU and a TCU, the The Monitor options provide current status
System allows you to power the TXU using DC power supplied of the STRATA TX System, including:
from the TCU or to power the TCU using DC power from the
TXU. This DC power is superimposed on the coaxial cable • Frequency Settings
between the TCU and the TXU. This DC power option is used
when the TCU and the TXU must be deployed in two separate • Mode - Analog or Digital
locations. • Audio Settings
When the TCU and TXU are co-located, both units should be • Video Settings
powered from the same DC power source. • System Errors.
If your STRATA TX System does not contain a TXU, the DC ON
COAX switch may not be present. If the switch is present, it
should be set to the OFF position.
If your STRATA TX System contains both a TXU and a TCU, the
System gives you several ways to control DC power on the
coaxial cable between the TCU and the TXU, depending on the
configurations of your TCU and TXU:

Turning the control switch to the left (ccw) Pressing the control switch causes an
displays the Command options. action to occur.
The Command options allow control of the
STRATA TX System, including: Command Options
• If the displayed setting is Chng Preset, Set
• Changing the Preset Channel, or Set PowerOut, pressing the
control switch causes the displayed setting to
• Setting the RF Channel Frequency
blink.
• Set Power Output Turning the control switch cw or ccw then
• Select No HPU or HPU Present (Turns displays the other options for that setting.
power from TXU to HPU on or off) When the desired option is displayed,
pressing the control switch selects that
• Select 75 Ohm Coax Power On or Power option.
Off (Turns power from TCU to TXU or TXU to
TCU on or off if DC power is superimposed on • If the displayed setting is HPU Coax or 75
the coaxial cable between the TCU and the Ohm Coax, pressing the control switch
TXU). causes the setting to switch to the other
choice (i.e., if 75 Ohm Coax Power Off is
displayed, pressing the control switch will
select 75 Ohm Coax Power On).
Transmit
changes the transmitter to the transmit mode
from the standby mode.
changes the transmitter from the transmit
mode to the standby mode.
TCU RS-232 Connector The RS-232 connector provides
connection to a Windows-based PC when using the STRATA TX
Configuration Utility software.
This connector also provides connection to the Standard or
Aircraft Remote Control Panel when used in mobile or aircraft
operations.

TCU POWER Connector The TCU POWER connector
mounted on the rear panel of the unit allows the TCU to operate Topic Page
on external power sources from +10.5 VDC to +48 VDC. DC POWER LED 3-10
TCU SIGNAL OUT Connector The TNC type SIGNAL OUT RF POWER LED 3-10
connector provides ASI, CODFM - IF, IF, or IF composite video RF IN Connector 3-10
output signals, depending upon the options contained in the unit.
RF Output Connector 3-10
In addition, if the TCU is used in conjunction with a separately
located TXU, DC power to or from the TXU is superimposed on Each of these indicators and connectors is described in more
the output signal coaxial cable to the TXU. detail in the following paragraphs. Indicators and connectors
TCU Monitor (MON) Connector If your TCU has COFDM/ contained on the HPU are shown in Figure 3-3.
MPEG installed, this rear panel output connector can be
configured (when operating in the digital mode) to provide either:
Figure 3-3: HPU Indicators and connectors
• 70 MHz IF
DC POWER RF POWER
• ASI (output of COFDM modulator, before decoding) LED LED
If your TCU is equipped with an analog modulator, this connector
provides only the 70 MHz IF signal output.
TCU SIGNAL IN Connector Video connections are made to
the BNC SIGNAL IN connector. Video input selections are
made by selecting Presets from the front panel control switch.
Presets are created using the STRATA TX Configuration Utility
software. For more information, see the “Advanced Operation”
Chapter on page 5-1 (part of the STRATA TX System Technical
Reference Manual only).
TCU AUDIO Connector Audio connections are made to the
(BLUE LIGHT ON)
CAUTION
rear panel AUDIO connector.
DC ON COAX
(HPU ON)
WHEN
3.2.3 HPU Indicators and Connectors
RF IN RF Output
Indicators and connectors contained on the HPU are identified Connector Connector
and described below. Topics covered are as follows:

DC POWER LED The HPU contains a front panel DC POWER POWER Switch The front panel POWER switch controls
LED. The DC POWER LED is illuminated when DC power is application of DC power to the DC OUTPUT connector. When
applied to the HPU from the TXU. The DC power from the TXU the switch is set to I (on), DC power is present at the DC
is superimposed on the coaxial cable connected between the OUTPUT connector. When set to 0 (off), no output DC power is
TXU and the HPU. present at the DC OUTPUT connector.
RF POWER LED The HPU also contains a front panel RF
POWER LED. The RF POWER LED is illuminated when DC Figure 3-4: ACU Controls, Indicators, and Connectors
power is applied to the unit when the TXU is transmitting.
RF IN Connector The RF IN connector is a type N connector
that receives both RF and DC power superimposed on the cable
between the TXU and the HPU.
RF Output Connector The RF output connector is a type N
connector that provides connection to an antenna. POWER Power
DC OUTPUT
AC INPUT
Switch LED FUSE Connector
Connector
3.2.4 ACU Controls, Indicators, and Connectors
Controls, indicators, and connectors contained on the optional
ACU are identified and described below. Topics covered are as
follows: < >
DC
OUTPUT
Topic Page
AC INPUT Connector 3-10
POWER Switch 3-10 Power LED The power LED is on when the POWER switch is
Power LED 3-10 set to I (on), indicating DC power is available at the DC OUTPUT
DC OUTPUT Connector 3-10 connector. The indicator is off when the POWER switch is set to
0 (off).
FUSE 3-10
DC OUTPUT Connector Depending upon the model of your
Each of the controls, indicators, and connectors are described in ACU, the DC OUTPUT connector mounted on the front panel of
more detail in the following paragraphs. Controls, indicators, and the unit provides +15 VDC, +28 VDC, or +48 VDC to provide
connectors contained on the ACU are shown in Figure 3-4. power to the TCU and/or TXU.
AC INPUT Connector The AC INPUT connector mounted on FUSE The fuse provides overload protection for AC input power.
the rear panel of the unit provides external AC power to the unit.

3.2.5 STRATA Remote Control Panel Controls, The cabling is permanently installed and power comes from
Indicators, and Connectors aircraft (or vehicle) power.
For controls, indicators, and connectors contained on the
3.3.2 Portable Deployment
optional STRATA Remote Control Panel, refer to the STRATA
Remote Control Panel Operator’s Guide, Document number For situations where you need to mount a STRATA TX System
400489. and its Fixed Mounting Bracket to an MRC tripod, MRC also
offers a Quick Release. See Figure 3-6.
3.2.6 STRATA Aircraft Remote Control Panel For situations where you are mounting to another type of tripod
Controls, Indicators, and Connectors that doesn’t directly accept the Quick Release, consult with MRC
or your tripod manufacturer. MRC has Dovetail Adapter Plates
For controls, indicators, and connectors contained on the
that will convert some types of tripods to accept the Quick
optional STRATA Aircraft Remote Control Panel, refer to the
Release.
STRATA Aircraft Remote Control Panel Operator’s Guide,
Document number 400490.
Figure 3-6: Fixed Mounting Bracket on Tripod
3.3 Preparing for Operation Fixed Mounting

Bracket
Each installation or deployment will have its own specific tasks
according to the application and the installed hardware.
3.3.1 Mobile Installation

For mobile applications such as aircraft or vehicle, the STRATA Quick Release
TX System is usually mounted in a bulkhead or compartment
using an MRC Fixed Mounting Bracket (Figure 3-5). Mounting
brackets are available to mount from one to three units.
MRC Tripod
(Typical)
Figure 3-5: Fixed Mounting Bracket

Figure 3-7: Universal Mounting Bracket on Tripod
Note The versatility of the Quick Release Mount and
mating Dovetail Adapter Plate allows the Dovetail Universal Mounting
Adapter Plate to be attached to the bottom of the Bracket
Universal Mounting Bracket and the Quick Release
Mount to be attached to a non-MRC tripod, or vice
versa. Mounting Plate
(for TXU, TCU, HPU, etc.)
For optional methods of attaching your STRATA TX
System to a non-MRC tripod, refer to the
“Installation” Chapter on page 6-1 (part of the
Quick Release
STRATA TX System Technical Reference Manual
only)
For portable applications where the STRATA TX System will be

MRC Tripod
moved from place to place and set up each time, the system will
(Typical)
usually be mounted in an MRC Universal Mounting Bracket. The
Universal Mounting Bracket will then be attached to a Quick
Release for easy mounting on an MRC tripod (Figure 3-7).
Universal Mounting Brackets are required for each unit in the
STRATA TX System, i.e., TXU, TCU, and an optional ACU. An For portable deployment situations where you are mounting to
HPU does not require a Universal Mounting Bracket as it is another type of tripod that doesn’t directly accept the Quick
delivered with mounting brackets that attach to a Universal Release, consult with MRC or your tripod manufacturer. MRC
Mounting Bracket. An HPU can only be mounted on the top of a has Dovetail Adapter Plates that will convert some types of
STRATA TX System. tripods to accept the Quick Release.
For applications using multiple units such as a TXU, TCU, and
an HPU, a Mounting Plate is also used to provide additional Note The procedures and illustrations contained in the
stiffness. The Mounting Plate typically remains attached following paragraph are typical, reflecting use of an
between the Universal Mounting Bracket and the Quick Release. MRC tripod.
The cabling between TX System units is also typically left in
place. The power, antenna and audio/video connections are Mounting to the Tripod Following are the general steps to
usually removed at the end of each deployment. mount a STRATA TX System to an MRC Tripod. These steps
assume the TX System is already assembled into its Universal

Mounting Bracket(s), and that the Mounting Plate and Quick Figure 3-9: Complete Tripod Installation
Release are attached.
Antenna
1. Attach the TX System to the Tripod using the Quick
Lock Plate
Release, as shown in Figure 3-8.
2. Attach the antenna to the TXU using the Antenna Lock HPU
Plate, or connect a coaxial cable from the TXU to the
antenna. See Figure 3-9.
TXU
If you have an HPU, the Antenna Lock Plate must be
attached to the HPU, or connect a coaxial cable from
the HPU to the antenna.
Universal
Antenna Mounting
If you have an HPU, be sure it is connected to the TXU
(2 Options Brackets
with a coaxial cable.
Shown) TCU
Figure 3-8: Attaching Quick Release to Tripod Mounting
Plate Quick
Release
MRC
Quick Release Tripod
MRC Tripod
3. If you have both an TXU and a TCU, be sure they are

connected to each other via coaxial cable.

If you are unsure of the connections, refer to the manually turn DC power on or off to the TXU from the TCU or to
“Installation” Chapter on page 6-1 (part of the STRATA the TCU from the TXU and from the TXU to the HPU using DC
TX System Technical Reference Manual only). ON COAX switches and TCU or TXU front panel control
4. Connect the STRATA TXU (and TCU, if present) to DC switches and alphanumeric display menus.
power of the correct voltage and polarity. The DC ON COAX switches provide the manual control and
must be set to ON to allow application of DC power to the TXU,
If you’re using a STRATA ACU, connect the AC input TCU, and HPU using the control switches and alphanumeric
to AC power and connect the DC output to the TXU display menus.
and TCU.
Powering STRATA TX Systems The method you use to power
If you are unsure of the power requirements or the up your STRATA TX System will vary, depending upon the
connections, refer to the “Installation” Chapter on following:
page 6-1 (part of the STRATA TX System Technical • The model of your STRATA TX System, whether or not
Reference Manual only). you have DC power manual override control.
5. Connect the TXU (or TCU) inputs to your audio and • The transmitter configuration, whether you are using a
video equipment. single TCU, a single TXU, a TCU and TXU, a TXU and an
HPU, or a TCU, TXU, and an HPU.
3.3.3 Powering the STRATA TX System
• Whether the TCU and TXU are to be co-located or
The STRATA TX System will be in one of two configurations physically separated over some distance.
which provide different options for controlling application of DC
power between units. Model variations are as follows: • Whether your STRATA TX System contains the optional
AC to DC Power Converter (ACU).
Superimposing DC Power In this configuration, DC power is
superimposed with the IF signals between units and there is no 3.3.4 Single TCU Power Up and Power Down
manual control of DC power. DC power is carried on the coaxial
cable between the TCU and the TXU and DC power is carried on If your STRATA TX System consists of a single TCU, perform the
the coaxial cable between the TXU and the HPU. following steps:
To turn DC power on and off, the operator uses the TCU and
TXU front panel PWR switches and either the TCU or TXU CAUTION To avoid possible damage, turn off DC
control switch and alphanumeric display menus. Power on the coax before connecting any
Superimposing DC Power with Manual Control In this test equipment.
configuration, DC power superimposed on the IF and RF signals
between the units is also manually controlled. The operator can

Power Up The exact screens will vary depending on installed
1. Verify the power cable is properly connected to the hardware.
TCU rear panel POWER connector. - The TCU will typically power up using the last settings
2. Verify all coaxial cables and connectors have been in use when power was turned off.
properly connected. - If the TCU does not power up normally, refer to the
3. Connect the TCU to DC power of the correct voltage “Troubleshooting” Chapter on page 4-1.
and polarity.
Figure 3-10: Typical TCU Power Up Screens - Single TCU
If you are unsure of the power requirements or the
Radio Version
connections, refer to the “Installation” Chapter on STRATA TX
page 6-1 (Part of the STRATA TX System Technical
Reference Manual only). V X.X.X
If the TCU is powered from the optional STRATA ACU, Main Screen
connect the ACU input to AC power and verify the Preset 1
TCU power cable is connected to the ACU DC 0.00W
OUTPUT connector. Set the ACU power switch to I
(on) and verify the ACU power LED is on.
Power Down
If the TCU is powered from a source other than an
ACU, turn that power source on. 1. Set the TCU PWR switch to 0 (off).
2. If the TCU is powered from the optional ACU, set the
4. Set the TCU PWR switch to I (on). ACU power switch to 0 (off).
5. The normal power-up sequence is as follows:
ACU, turn that power source off.
- The Status LED above the PWR switch should
illuminate and should change colors from red, to 3.3.5 Single TXU Power up and Power Down
green, to amber, and finally remain green.
If your STRATA TX System consists of a single TXU, perform the
- The alphanumeric display should light up and quickly
following steps:
display a self-test screen, then the radio version, and
finally the Main Screen.
Some typical screens are shown in Figure 3-10.

illuminate and should change colors from red, to
CAUTION To avoid possible damage, turn off DC green, to amber, and finally remain green.
Power on the coax before connecting any - The alphanumeric display should light up and quickly
test equipment. display a self-test screen, then the radio version, and
Some typical screens are shown in Figure 3-11. The
Power Up exact screens will vary depending on installed
1. Verify the power cable is properly connected to the hardware.
TXU front panel POWER connector. - The TXU will typically power up using the last settings
2. Verify all coaxial cables and connectors have been in use when power was turned off.
properly connected. - If the TXU does not power up normally, refer to the
3. Connect the TXU to DC power of the correct voltage “Troubleshooting” Chapter on page 4-1.
and polarity.
Figure 3-11: Typical TXU Power Up Screens - Single TXU
connections, refer to the “Installation” Chapter on Radio Version STRATA TX
Reference Manual only). V X.X.X
If the TXU is powered from the optional STRATA ACU, Main Screen
connect the ACU input to AC power and verify the Preset 1
TXU power cable is connected to the ACU DC
0.00W
Power Down
If the TXU is powered from a source other than an
ACU, turn that power source on. 1. Set the TXU PWR switch to 0 (off).
2. If the TXU is powered from the optional ACU, set the
4. Set the TXU PWR switch to I (on). ACU power switch to 0 (off).
If the TXU is powered from a source other than an
ACU, turn that power source off.

3.3.6 TXU and TCU Power Up and Power Down - 4. Turn the recessed DC ON COAX switch on the front
Co-Located panel of the TXU until the screw slot of the switch
points to OFF.
If your STRATA TX System consists of a co-located TXU and a
5. Verify all coaxial cables and connectors have been
TCU, it is recommended that both the TCU and TXU be powered
properly connected.
from the same DC power supply in lieu of using superimposed
DC power on the coaxial cable between the TCU and the TXU. 6. Connect the TCU and TXU to DC power of the correct
voltage and polarity.
Note The following procedure reflects use of a single DC If you are unsure of the power requirements or the
power source for both the TXU and TCU in lieu of connections, refer to the “Installation” Chapter on
using superimposed DC power on the coaxial page 6-1 (Part of the STRATA TX System Technical
cable between the TCU and the TXU. Reference Manual only).
Perform the following steps to power up or power down a co- If the TCU and TXU are both powered from the
located TX System: optional STRATA ACU, connect the ACU input to AC
power and verify the TCU and TXU branched power
cable is connected to the ACU DC OUTPUT
CAUTION To avoid possible damage, turn off DC connector. Set the ACU power switch to I (on) and
Power on the coax before connecting any verify the ACU power LED is on.
test equipment.
If the TCU and TXU are powered from a source other
Power Up than an ACU, turn that power source on.
1. Verify the power cable is properly connected to the
7. Set the TCU PWR switch to I (on).
TCU rear panel POWER connector.
TXU front panel PWR/RS-485 connector.
Note If your TCU and TXU do not have DC ON COAX illuminate and should change colors from red, to
switches, go to step 5. green, to amber, and finally remain green.
3. Turn the recessed DC ON COAX switch on the front display a self-test screen, then the radio version, and
panel of the TCU until the screw slot of the switch finally the Main Screen.
points to OFF.

Some typical screens are shown in Figure 3-12. The - The TXU will typically power up using the last settings
exact screens will vary depending on installed in use when power was turned off.
hardware. If the TXU does not power up normally, refer to the
- The TCU will typically power up using the last settings “Troubleshooting” Chapter on page 4-1.
in use when power was turned off.
If the TCU does not power up normally, refer to the Figure 3-13: Typical TXU Power Up Screens - Co-Located
“Troubleshooting” Chapter on page 4-1. TXU and TCU
Figure 3-12: Typical TCU Power Up Screens - Co-Located

TXU and TCU Radio Version STRATA TX
V X.X.X
Radio Version STRATA TX
Main Screen
V X.X.X Preset 1
0.00W
Main Screen Preset 1
0.00W Power Down
1. Set the TXU PWR switch to 0 (off).
2. Set the TCU PWR switch to 0 (off).
9. Set the TXU PWR switch to I (on).
3. If the TXU and TCU are powered from the optional
10. The normal power-up sequence is as follows: ACU, set the ACU power switch to 0 (off).
- The Status LED above the PWR switch should If the TCU and TXU are powered from a source other
illuminate and should change colors from red, to than an ACU, turn that power source off.
- The alphanumeric display should light up and quickly 3.3.7 TXU and TCU Power Up and Power Down -
display a self-test screen, then the radio version, and Separate Locations
If your STRATA TX System consists of a TXU and a TCU and the
TCU is located in a separate location from the TXU, the TXU will
exact screens will vary depending on installed
be powered using the superimposed DC power on the coaxial
hardware.

cable between the TCU and the TXU or the TCU will be powered
using DC power superimposed on the coaxial cable from the Note When the TCU and TXU are mounted in separate
TXU. locations, it is recommended that DC input power
be connected to the TXU.
Perform the following steps to power up or power down a
separately located TXU and TCU TX System: Since either unit may be powered from the other
unit via DC power superimposed on the coaxial
cable between the units, DC input power may
CAUTION To avoid possible damage, turn off DC
therefore be applied to either the TXU or the TCU.
Power on the coax before connecting any
test equipment.
5. Connect the TCU or TXU to DC power of the correct
Power Up
1. Verify the power cable is properly connected to the connections, refer to the “Installation” Chapter on
TCU rear panel POWER connector or the TXU front page 6-1 (Part of the STRATA TX System Technical
panel PWR/RS-485 connector. Reference Manual only).
Note If your TCU and TXU do not have DC ON COAX If the TCU/TXU is powered from the optional STRATA
switches, go to step 4. ACU, connect the ACU input to AC power and verify
the TCU/TXU power cable is connected to the ACU
2. Turn the recessed DC ON COAX switch on the front DC OUTPUT connector. Set the ACU power switch to
panel of the TCU until the screw slot of the switch I (on) and verify the ACU power LED is on.
points to ON.
3. Turn the recessed DC ON COAX switch on the front If the TCU is powered from a source other than an
panel of the TXU until the screw slot of the switch ACU, turn that power source on.
points to ON.
4. Verify all coaxial cables and connectors have been 6. Set the TCU PWR switch to I (on).
properly connected. 7. The normal power-up sequence is as follows:


- The alphanumeric display should light up and quickly 9. Press control switch to change Power Off to read
display a self-test screen, then the radio version, and Power On, as required.
finally the Main Screen. 10. Set the TXU PWR switch to I (on).
Some typical screens are shown in Figure 3-14. The 11. The normal power-up sequence is as follows:
hardware.
- The TCU will typically power up using the last settings illuminate and should change colors from red, to
in use when power was turned off. green, to amber, and finally remain green.
If the TCU does not power up normally, refer to the
“Troubleshooting” Chapter on page 4-1. - The alphanumeric display should light up and quickly
Figure 3-14: Typical TCU Power Up Screens - Separately finally the Main Screen.
Located TXU and TCU Some typical screens are shown in Figure 3-16. The
Radio Version hardware.
STRATA TX
- The TXU will typically power up using the last settings
V X.X.X in use when power was turned off.
If the TXU does not power up normally, refer to the
Main Screen “Troubleshooting” Chapter on page 4-1.
Preset 1
0.00W
Figure 3-16: Typical TXU Power Up Screens - Co-Located
TXU and TCU
8. Rotate the TCU control switch ccw until the 75 Ohm Radio Version
STRATA TX
Coax option (Figure 3-15) is displayed on the
alphanumeric display. V X.X.X
Figure 3-15: 75 Ohm Coax Option Preset 1

Main Screen
75 Ohm Coax 0.00W
Power Off

Power Down 3. Turn the recessed DC ON COAX switch on the rear
panel of the TXU until the screw slot of the switch
1. Set the TXU PWR switch to 0 (off).
points to ON.
2. Set the TCU PWR switch to 0 (off).
3. If the TCU/TXU is powered from the optional ACU, set properly connected.
the ACU power switch to 0 (off).
5. Connect the TXU to DC power of the correct voltage
If the TCU/TXU is powered from a source other than and polarity.
an ACU, turn that power source off.
connections, refer to the “Installation” Chapter on
3.3.8 TXU and HPU Power Up and Power Down page 6-1 (Part of the STRATA TX System Technical
If your STRATA TX System consists of a TXU and an HPU, the Reference Manual only).
HPU will be powered using superimposed DC power on the
coaxial cable from the TXU to the HPU. If the TXU is powered from the optional STRATA ACU,
Perform the following steps to power up or power down a TXU connect the ACU input to AC power and verify the
and HPU TX System: TXU power cable is connected to the ACU DC
Power on the coax before connecting any If the TXU is powered from a source other than an
test equipment. ACU, turn that power source on.
6. Set the TXU PWR switch to I (on).

Power Up
TXU front panel PWR/RS-485 connector. - The Status LED above the PWR switch should
Note If your TXU does not have DC ON COAX green, to amber, and finally remain green.
switches, go to step 4.
2. Turn the recessed DC ON COAX switch on the front
panel of the TXU until the screw slot of the switch
Some typical screens are shown in Figure 3-17 on
points to OFF.
page 3-22. The exact screens will vary depending on
installed hardware.

- The TXU will typically power up using the last settings
in use when power was turned off. If the TCU is powered from a source other than an
If the TXU does not power up normally, refer to the ACU, turn that power source off.
“Troubleshooting” Chapter on page 4-1.
3.3.9 TXU, TCU, and HPU Power Up and Power
Figure 3-17: Typical TXU Power Up Screens - TXU and HPU Down - TXU and TCU Co-Located
Radio Version If your STRATA TX System consists of a TXU, a TCU, and an
STRATA TX HPU, the HPU will be powered using superimposed DC power
V X.X.X on the coaxial cable from the TXU to the HPU.
If your STRATA TX System includes a co-located TXU and a
TCU, it is recommended that both the TCU and TXU be powered
Main Screen Preset 1 from the same DC power supply in lieu of using superimposed
DC power from the TCU to the TXU.
0.00W
Note The following procedure reflects use of a single DC

8. Rotate the TXU control switch ccw until the HPU Coax power source for both the TXU and TCU in lieu of
option (Figure 3-18) is displayed on the alphanumeric using superimposed DC power on the coaxial
display. cable between the TCU and the TXU.
Figure 3-18: HPU Coax Option Perform the following steps to power up or power down a co-
located TXU, TCU, and HPU TX System:
HPU Coax
No HPU
Power on the coax before connecting any
test equipment.
9. Press control switch to change No HPU to read HPU
Present, as required.
Power Up
Power Down
1. Set the TXU PWR switch to 0 (off). TCU rear panel POWER connector.
2. If the TXU is powered from the optional ACU, set the 2. Verify the power cable is properly connected to the
ACU power switch to 0 (off). TXU front panel PWR/RS-485 connector.

Note If your TCU and TXU do not have DC ON COAX - The Status LED above the PWR switch should
switches, go to step 6. illuminate and should change colors from red, to
3. Turn the recessed DC ON COAX switch on the front - The alphanumeric display should light up and quickly
panel of the TCU until the screw slot of the switch display a self-test screen, then the radio version, and
points to OFF. finally the Main Screen.
4. Turn the recessed DC ON COAX switch on the front Some typical screens are shown in Figure 3-19. The
panel of the TXU until the screw slot of the switch exact screens will vary depending on installed
points to OFF. hardware.
5. Turn the recessed DC ON COAX switch on the rear of - The TCU will typically power up using the last settings
the TXU until the screw slot of the switch points to ON. in use when power was turned off.
6. Verify all coaxial cables and connectors have been If the TCU does not power up normally, refer to the
properly connected. “Troubleshooting” Chapter on page 4-1.
7. Connect the TCU and TXU to DC power of the correct
voltage and polarity. Figure 3-19: Typical TCU Power Up Screens - Co-Located
TXU, TCU, and HPU
Radio Version
page 6-1 (Part of the STRATA TX System Technical STRATA TX
V .X.X.X
If the TCU and TXU are both powered from the
optional STRATA ACU, connect the ACU input to AC
power and verify the TCU and TXU branched power Preset 1
cable is connected to the ACU DC OUTPUT Main Screen
connector. Set the ACU power switch to I (on) and 0.00W
verify the ACU power LED is on.
If the TCU and TXU are powered from a source other 10. Set the TXU PWR switch to I (on).
than an ACU, turn that power source on. 11. The normal power-up sequence is as follows:
8. Set the TCU PWR switch to I (on).

- The Status LED above the PWR switch should 12. Rotate the control switch ccw until the HPU Coax
illuminate and should change colors from red, to option (Figure 3-21) is displayed on the alphanumeric
green, to amber, and finally remain green. display.
display a self-test screen, then the radio version, and Figure 3-21: HPU Coax Option - Co-Located TXU, TCU, and
finally the Main Screen. HPU
hardware. HPU Coax
- The TXU will typically power up using the last settings No HPU
in use when power was turned off.
If the TXU does not power up normally, refer to the
Figure 3-20: Typical TXU Power Up Screens - Co-Located Present, as required.
TXU, TCU, and HPU
Power Down
Radio Version STRATA TX 1. Set the TXU PWR switch to 0 (off).
V X.X.X 2. Set the TCU PWR switch to 0 (off).
3. If the TXU and TCU are powered from the optional
ACU, set the ACU power switch to 0 (off).
Preset 1
Main Screen
If the TCU and TXU are powered from a source other
0.00W than an ACU, turn that power source off.
3.3.10 TXU, TCU, and HPU Power Up and Power

Steps 12 and 13 may be performed at either the
Down - TXU and TCU Separate Locations
Note
TXU or the TCU. If your STRATA TX System consists of a TXU, a TCU, and an
HPU and the TCU is located in a separate location from the TXU,
the TXU will be powered using the superimposed DC power on
the coaxial cable between the TCU and the TXU or the TCU will

be powered from superimposed DC power from the TXU. The
HPU will be powered using DC power superimposed on the Note When the TCU and TXU are mounted in separate
coaxial cable from the TXU to the HPU. locations, it is generally recommended that DC
input power be connected to the TXU.
Perform the following steps to power up or power down a
separately located TXU, TCU, and HPU TX System: Since either unit may be powered from the other
unit via DC power superimposed on the coaxial
cable between the units, DC input power may
Power on the coax before connecting any therefore be applied to either the TXU or the TCU.
test equipment.
6. Connect the TCU/TXU to DC power of the correct
Power Up
TCU rear panel POWER connector or the TXU front
panel PWR/RS-485 connector.
Note If your TCU and TXU do not have DC ON COAX
If the TCU/TXU is powered from the optional STRATA
switches, go to step 5.
ACU, connect the ACU input to AC power and verify
the TCU/TXU power cable is connected to the ACU
2. Turn the recessed DC ON COAX switch on the front DC OUTPUT connector. Set the ACU power switch to
panel of the TCU until the screw slot of the switch I (on) and verify the ACU power LED is on.
points to ON.
3. Turn the recessed DC ON COAX switch on the front If the TCU/TXU is powered from a source other than
panel of the TXU until the screw slot of the switch an ACU, turn that power source on.
points to ON.
4. Turn the recessed DC ON COAX switch on the rear of 7. Set the TCU PWR switch to I (on).
the TXU until the screw slot of the switch points to ON. 8. The normal power-up sequence is as follows:
properly connected. - The Status LED above the PWR switch should

- The alphanumeric display should light up and quickly 10. Press control switch to change Power Off to read
display a self-test screen, then the radio version, and Power On, as required.
finally the Main Screen. 11. Set the TXU PWR switch to I (on).
Some typical screens are shown in Figure 3-22. The 12. The normal power-up sequence is as follows:
hardware.
- The TCU will typically power up using the last settings illuminate and should change colors from red, to
in use when power was turned off. green, to amber, and finally remain green.
If the TCU does not power up normally, refer to the
“Troubleshooting” Chapter on page 4-1. - The alphanumeric display should light up and quickly
Figure 3-22: Typical TCU Power Up Screens - TXU and TCU finally the Main Screen.
Separate Locations Some typical screens are shown in Figure 3-24. The
hardware.
Radio Version - The TXU will typically power up using the last settings
STRATA TX in use when power was turned off.
V X.X.X If the TXU does not power up normally, refer to the
Preset 1 Figure 3-24: Typical TXU Power Up Screens - TXU and TCU
Main Screen Separate Locations
0.00W
Radio Version
STRATA TX
9. Rotate the TCU control switch ccw until the 75 Ohm
Coax option (Figure 3-23) is displayed on the V X.X.X
alphanumeric display.
Figure 3-23: 75 Ohm Coax Option - Co-Located Preset 1

Main Screen
75 Ohm Coax 0.00W
Power Off

13. Rotate the TXU control switch ccw until the HPU Coax When the STRATA TX System completes its power-up
option (Figure 3-25) is displayed on the alphanumeric sequence, it will display the Main screen. A typical Main screen
display. is shown in Figure 3-26.
Figure 3-25: HPU Coax Option - Co-Located Figure 3-26: Typical STRATA TX Main Screen
Currently
HPU Coax Selected
Preset Preset 3
No HPU . W
Output Power
Level
Present, as required
Power Down Accessing the Main Screen You can access the Main screen
at any time by scrolling to the end of the screens you are viewing
1. Set the TXU PWR switch to 0 (off). (either Monitor or Control). Your next click of the control switch
2. Set the TCU PWR switch to 0 (off). will bring up the Main screen.
3. If the TCU is powered from the optional ACU, set the Accessing the Monitor Screen You can access the Monitor
ACU power switch to 0 (off). option screen at any time by turning the control switch clockwise
(cw).
ACU, turn that power source off. Accessing the Control Screen You can access the Control
option screen at any time by turning the control switch counter-
clockwise (ccw).
3.4 Using the STRATA TX Screens Default to Main Screen If you do not turn or push the control
As you use the STRATA TX System, you will interact extensively switch for a period of about 7 seconds, the display will default to
with the TXU and/or TCU screens. Following are some points to the Main screen.
make this easier. If you turn the control switch within those 7 seconds, you will
Main Screen The Main screen is your starting point for continue scrolling within that set of screens (Monitor or Control).
navigating through the Monitor and Control option screens. The Unit vs.System Control If you’re using a standalone TXU or
Main screen provides the current values of the Preset selected TCU, the menus and options that appear on the display will be
and the selected Preset output power level. based on the hardware option(s) installed in that individual unit.

When you connect your TCU and TXU, the two units The following sections describe how to use the Monitor screens
automatically detect what hardware is installed in each unit, and and how to monitor the quality of the microwave link.
automatically configure the menus and options to match the Here are the tasks described:
installed hardware. The connected STRATA TX System then
allows you to control the entire system from either the TXU or the
TCU front panel.
Topic Page
Using the Monitor Screens in 3-28
3.5 TXU and/or TCU Monitoring MPEG IF Out Mode
Operations Using the Monitor Screens in 3-30
MPEG ASI Out Mode
Using the Monitor Screens in 3-31
Note In the following paragraphs, the options displayed
COFDM ASI In Mode
on the Monitor screens are shown in bold fonts.
Using the Monitor Screens in Ext. 3-32
IF In Mode
The STRATA TX System Presets are set to six possible modes
of operation, based on the options contained in your TXU and/or Using the Monitor Screens in 3-33
TCU. These operating modes are established using the STRATA Analog IF Mode
TX Configuration Utility software. The operating mode options Using the Monitor Screens in DVB- 3-34
available via the STRATA TX Configuration Utility software are Satellite Mode
as follows:
• MPEG IF Out (COFDM - IF mode) 3.5.1 Using the Monitor Screens in MPEG IF Out
Mode
• MPEG - ASI Out (MPEG Output mode) (Standalone TCU
Operation Only) When the STRATA TX System is operating in the MPEG IF Out
(COFDM-IF) mode, 70 MHz COFDM IF output from the internal
• COFDM - ASI In (COFDM ASI In mode) COFDM/MPEG board is supplied to the output and monitor ports
• Ext. IF In (Ext IF Input mode) and to the TXU, if present.
• Analog IF Out (Analog - IF mode) See Figure 3-27 on page 3-29 for the COFDM-IF Monitor Menu
Map.
• DVB-Satellite (DVB-S mode) (Standalone TCU Operation
Only)
Once the STRATA TX System is set up and powered up, you will
be able to check its configuration and monitor its operation.

Figure 3-27: COFDM - IF Monitor Menu Map

3.5.2 Using the Monitor Screens in MPEG ASI stream is supplied to the signal output connector and the monitor
Out Mode output connector. The MPEG Output mode is only available
when the TCU is operated in a standalone configuration.
When the STRATA TX System Preset selected is operating in
the MPEG-ASI Out (MPEG Output) mode, a DVB ASI transport See Figure 3-28 for the MPEG Output Monitor Menu Map.
Figure 3-28: MPEG Output Monitor Menu Map

3.5.3 Using the Monitor Screens in COFDM ASI (COFDM ASI In) mode, the internal MPEG encoder is bypassed
In Mode and an externally supplied ASI stream is routed to the monitor
and output connectors and then to the TXU, if present.
When the STRATA TX System is operating in the COFDM ASI In
See Figure 3-29 for the COFDM ASI In Menu Map.
Figure 3-29: COFDM ASI In Monitor Map

3.5.4 Using the Monitor Screens in Ext. IF In connector is routed through the TCU to the TXU (if present).
Mode See Figure 3-30 for the Ext IF Input Monitor Menu Map.
When the STRATA TX System is operating in the Ext. IF In (Ext
IF Input) mode, the 70 MHz IF input signal from the input
Figure 3-30: Ext IF Input Monitor Menu Map

3.5.5 Using the Monitor Screens in Analog IF Out (Analog-IF) mode, the 70 MHz FM output is routed to the
Mode TXU, if present. This option is only available if the FMT option is
installed.
When the STRATA TX System is operating in the ANALOG IF
See Figure 3-31 for the Analog-IF Monitor Menu Map.
Figure 3-31: Analog-IF Monitor Menu Map

3.5.6 Using the Monitor Screens in DVB-Satellite supplies a configurable DVB-S signal to the TCU signal output
Mode and monitor connectors. This mode is operational for QPSK, 16
QAM, and 8 PSK modulation formats. This mode is used for
When the STRATA TX System is operating in the DVB-Satellite standalone TCU operations only.
(DVB-S) mode, this mode utilizes a single carrier modulator and
See Figure 3-32 for the DVB-S Monitor Menu Map.
Figure 3-32: DVB-S Monitor Menu Map

3.6 TXU and/or TCU Control
Operations
This section describes how to configure your STRATA TX
System using the front panel control switch. Turning the front
panel control switch counterclockwise on either the TXU or TCU
controls transmitter functions including changing Presets,
changing RF channel assignments, setting RF attenuation
levels, and activation of DC power to an HPU from a TXU, from a
TCU to a separately located TXU, or from a TXU to a separately
located TCU.
Settings may be changed on a standalone TCU, standalone
TXU, a TXU and TCU, a TXU and HPU, or a TXU, TCU, and
HPU TX System.
For a summary of settings that can be changed using the front
panel control switch and which are made using the STRATA TX
Configuration Utility software, see “Front Panel vs. STRATA TX
Configurator Settings” on page 3-42.
Here are the tasks described:
Topic Page
Changing a Preset 3-37
Setting a Channel 3-38
Setting Power Output 3-39
Controlling TXU to HPU 3-39
DC Power on Coax
Controlling TXU to TCU 3-40
DC Power on Coax
Refer to Figure 3-33 on page 3-36 for the Control Menu Map.

Figure 3-33: Control Menu Map Changing a Preset

3.6.1 Changing a Preset Figure 3-34: Main Screen - Changing a Preset
The STRATA TX is designed to enable you to control operating Preset 3
settings through Presets stored in the transmitter. The STRATA . W
TCU and TXU are shipped with factory Presets and can be
customized for the user.
3. Turn the control switch ccw until the display reads
Your STRATA TX System can be pre-configured with up to 9
Chng Preset.
Presets. Each Preset contains most of the operating settings
needed to control the STRATA TX System. System Presets can
only be defined and changed using the STRATA TX Note Changing Presets when the TX System is in the
Configuration Utility software. Presets cannot be changed from transmit mode will place the transmitter in the
the TXU or TCU front panels. standby mode when the control switch is pressed.
For information on configuring Presets, see the “Configurator
Reference” Appendix on page C-1 (part of the STRATA TX 4. Press the control switch to select Chng Preset. See
Technical Reference Manual only). Figure 3-35.
Figure 3-35: Change Preset Screen (Typical)

Notes When you change a Preset, the new Preset
Chng Preset
remains in effect. When the TX System is powered Blinking
down, that Preset is active when the TX System is Preset 1
powered up again.
5. Observe the current Preset setting begins to blink.
When a Preset is changed, the Channel does not
change. 6. Turn the control switch cw or ccw until the desired
Preset is displayed.
When a Channel is changed, the Preset does not 7. Press the control switch once to select that Preset.
change. 8. Observe display changes back to the Main Screen
after a short delay.
To change Presets, perform the following steps: 9. Observe newly selected Preset is displayed on Main
1. Verify the STRATA TX System is connected and Screen. See Figure 3-36.
powered up. See ”Powering the STRATA TX System”
on page 3-14. Figure 3-36: Main Screen (Typical) - Preset Changed
2. Observe the Main Screen (Figure 3-34) is displayed. Preset New
. W Preset

10. Press the control switch for one second to place the 2. Observe the Main Screen (Figure 3-37) is displayed.
TX System in the transmit mode, as required.
Figure 3-37: Main Screen
3.6.2 Setting a Channel Preset 3
The STRATA TX Channel and Offset, other than the Preset . W
Channel pre-programmed using the STRATA TX Configuration
Utility software, can be selected from the TXU or TCU front panel
and can be configured for operation on any of up to 10 3. Turn the control switch ccw until the display reads Set
Channels, with (+) and (-) offsets. For more information, see the Channel. See Figure 3-38.
“Channels & Frequencies” Appendix on page A-1.
Figure 3-38: Change a Channel (Typical)
Frequencies assigned to each Channel must be configured
using the STRATA TX Configuration Utility software. The Set Channel
frequencies cannot be changed from either the TXU or TCU front
panels. Not On Chnl
For information on configuring Channels, see the “Configurator
Reference” Chapter on page C-1 (part of the STRATA TX
System Technical Reference Manual only). Note Changing Channels when the TX System is in the
transmit mode will place the transmitter in the
standby mode when the control switch is pressed.
Notes The Preset will retain the new Channel when the
TX System is powered off. When the TX System is 4. Press the control switch once to select Set Channel
powered up again, the new Channel setting will be and observe the Channel selected begins to blink.
retained.
5. Turn the control switch cw or ccw until the desired
Channel and Offset are displayed.
When a Preset is changed, the Channel does not
change. 6. Press the control switch once to select that Channel
and Offset.
When a Channel is changed, the Preset does not 7. Observe the display changes back to the Main Screen
change. after a short delay.
8. Press the control switch for one second to place the
To select which Channel to modify, perform the following steps: TX System in the transmit mode, as required.
1. Verify the STRATA TX System is connected and
powered up. See ”Powering the STRATA TX System”
on page 3-14.

3.6.3 Setting Power Output
Notes Changing power output attenuation when the TX
The power output of your STRATA TX System can be set by System is in the transmit mode may place the
controlling the attenuation, in dB, from either the TXU or TCU transmitter in the standby mode if the control
front panel. Setting the attenuation level does affect the output switch is pressed for more than 2 seconds.
power of the HPU, if your TX System contains an HPU.
Output power attenuation level must be reset or
Note Maximum power output occurs with 0 dB of verified whenever Presets are changed.
attenuation selected. Attenuation levels from 0 dB
to -31 dB may be selected in 1 dB increments. 4. Press the control switch once and observe the ATTN:
dB line begins to blink.
To select power output attenuation, perform the following steps: 5. Turn the control switch cw or ccw until the desired
1. Verify the STRATA TX System is connected and attenuation level is displayed.
powered up. See ”Powering the STRATA TX System” 6. Press the control switch to select the power output
on page 3-14. attenuation level.
2. Observe the Main Screen (Figure 3-39) is displayed. 7. Observe the new attenuation level is displayed.
8. After a short delay, observe the Main Screen is
Figure 3-39: Main Screen (Typical) - Power Output displayed.
Preset 3
TX System in the transmit mode, as required.
. W
3.6.4 Controlling TXU to HPU DC Power on Coax
3. Turn the control switch ccw until the display reads An HPU can only be used in conjunction with a TXU. If your
Set PowerOut. See Figure 3-40. STRATA TX System also contains a TCU, DC power from the
TXU to the HPU may be controlled from either the TXU or the
Figure 3-40: Change Power Output (Typical) TCU front panel control switch and display.
Set PowerOut If your TXU configuration also contains a DC ON COAX switch
mounted on the rear panel of the TXU, this switch must be set to
Attn: dB ON, in addition to applying DC power to the HPU using either the
TXU or TCU control switch and display to provide DC power to
the HPU.

To apply or remove DC power from the TXU to the HPU
superimposed on the coaxial cable between the two units, Note Pressing the control switch to select application of
perform the following steps. DC power on the coaxial cable from the TXU to the
HPU when the TX System is in the transmit mode
Apply DC Power on Coax will place the transmitter in the standby mode.
powered up. See ”Powering the STRATA TX System” 5. Press the control switch one time to change the
on page 3-14. display from No HPU to HPU Present.
2. Observe the Main Screen (Figure 3-41) is displayed. 6. After a short delay, observe the Main Screen is
displayed.
Preset 3 Note When the TX System is transmitting, backoff
. W attenuation is added to obtain the proper pedestal
output from the HPU.
Note If your TX System does not contain a DC ON 7. Press the control switch for one second to place the
COAX switch located on the rear panel of the TXU, TX System in the transmit mode, as required.
go to step 4. Remove DC Power on Coax
3. Turn the recessed DC ON COAX switch on the rear 1. Observe the Main Screen is displayed.
panel of the TXU until the screw slot points to ON. 2. Turn the control switch ccw until the display reads
4. Turn the control switch ccw until the display reads HPU Coax.
HPU Coax. See Figure 3-42. 3. Press the control switch one time to change the
display from HPU Present to No HPU.
Figure 3-42: HPU Coax 4. After a short delay, observe the Main Screen is
HPU Coax displayed.
5. Turn the recessed DC ON COAX switch on the rear
No HPU panel of the TXU until the screw slot points to OFF.
3.6.5 Controlling TXU to TCU DC Power on Coax

If your STRATA TX System requires the TXU and TCU to be

mounted in separate locations, MRC recommends powering the 2. Observe the Main Screen (Figure 3-43) is displayed.
TCU via the coaxial cable from the TXU.
Note When the TCU and TXU are mounted in separate Preset 3
locations, it is recommended that DC input power . W
be connected to the TXU.
Since either unit may be powered from the other

unit via DC power superimposed on the coaxial Note If your TX system does not contain DC ON COAX
cable between the units, DC input power may switches on the TXU and TCU, go to step 5.
therefore be applied to either the TXU or the TCU.
3. Turn the recessed DC ON COAX switch on the front
If your TXU and TCU configurations also contain DC ON COAX panel of the TCU until the screw slot points to ON.
switches mounted on the units, these switches must be set to 4. Turn the recessed DC ON COAX switch on the front
ON in addition to controlling DC power superimposed on the panel of the TXU until the screw slot points to ON.
coaxial cable from the TXU to the TCU or from the TCU to the 5. Turn the control switch ccw until the display reads 75
TXU. Ohm Coax. See Figure 3-44.
To apply DC power from the TXU to the TCU superimposed on
the coaxial cable between the two units, perform the following Figure 3-44: 75 Ohm Coax
steps.
75 Ohm Coax
Notes This procedure must only be performed on Power Off

STRATA TX Systems where the TXU and TCU are
physically mounted in separate locations.
This procedure may be performed using either the Note Pressing the control switch to select application of
TXU or TCU control switch and display. DC power on the coaxial cable from the TXU to the
TCU or from the TCU to the TXU when the TX
Apply DC Power on Coax System is in the transmit mode will place the
transmitter in the standby mode.
powered up. See ”Powering the STRATA TX System” 6. Press the control switch one time to change Power
on page 3-14. Off to Power On.

7. After a short delay, observe the Main Screen is
displayed. Table 3-1: Front Panel vs. Configurator Settings
TX System in the transmit mode, as required. Set
Remove DC Power on Coax Available Using Set Using TX
Parameter
Settings Control Configurator
1. Observe the Main Screen is displayed. Switch
2. Turn the control switch ccw until the display reads 75 Presets
Ohm Coax.
Preset in use 1, 2,... 9 ✔ ✔
3. Press the control switch one time to change the
Preset text Any 12 ✔
display from Power On to Power Off.
alphanumeric
4. After a short delay, observe the Main Screen is characters
displayed. Operation Mode • MPEG IF Out ✔
5. Turn the recessed DC ON COAX switch on the front • MPEG ASI ✔
panel of the TCU until the screw slot points to OFF. Out
6. Turn the recessed DC ON COAX switch on the front • COFDM-ASI ✔
panel of the TXU until the screw slot points to OFF. In
• Ext IF In ✔
3.7 Front Panel vs. STRATA TX • Analog IF Out ✔
• DVB-Satellite ✔
Configurator Settings
Color Bars • PAL ✔
The design of the STRATA TX System and STRATA TX • NTSC ✔
Configuration Utility software makes commonly available
• OFF ✔
settings accessible from the TXU and/or TCU front panel and
more advanced settings accessible through the STRATA TX • Auto ✔
Configuration Utility. IF CW Tone • ON ✔
A summary of settings that can be controlled by each method is • OFF ✔
shown in Table 3-1. Channels
Channel & • 1 thru 10 ✔
Offset in use • -, Center, + ✔

Table 3-1: Front Panel vs. Configurator Settings (Continued) Table 3-1: Front Panel vs. Configurator Settings (Continued)
Set Set
Available Using Set Using TX Available Using Set Using TX
Parameter Parameter
Settings Control Configurator Settings Control Configurator
Switch Switch
Channel & Depends on band ✔ Audio B Type • OFF ✔
Offset • MPEG ✔
frequencies
• Linear ✔
DC Power
Audio A Mode • Stereo ✔
DC On Coax • No HPU ✔
(HPU Coax) • Dual Mono ✔
• HPU Present ✔
Audio B Mode • Stereo ✔
DC On Coax (75 • Power Off ✔
Ohm Coax) • Dual Mono ✔
• Power On ✔
Audio A Input • Test Tone ✔
COFDM
• Analog ✔
COFDM • 6 MHz ✔
Bandwidth • SDI EMB ✔
• 7 MHz ✔
• AES EBU ✔
• 8 MHz ✔
Audio B Input • Test Tone ✔
COFDM • QSPK ✔
Modulation • Analog ✔
• 16 QAM ✔
(MPEG IF Out • SDI EMB ✔
and COFDM- • 64 QAM ✔
• AES EBU ✔
ASI In Modes)
BISS • OFF ✔
COFDM Guard • 1/32 ✔
• BISS-1 ✔
Interval • 1/16 ✔
• BISS-E ✔
• 1/8 ✔
Video Input • SDI 625 In ✔
• 1/4 ✔
• PAL In ✔
MPEG
• PAL M In ✔
Audio A Type • OFF ✔
• PAL N In ✔
• MPEG ✔
• Linear ✔

Table 3-1: Front Panel vs. Configurator Settings (Continued) Table 3-1: Front Panel vs. Configurator Settings (Continued)
Set Set
Available Using Set Using TX Available Using Set Using TX
Parameter Parameter
Settings Control Configurator Settings Control Configurator
Switch Switch
Chroma Format • 4:2:0 ✔ Pre-emphasis • Selected ✔
• 4:2:2 ✔ • Not selected ✔
Delay Mode • Standard ✔ DVB-Satellite
• Low ✔ Modulation • QSPK ✔
Wayside • OFF ✔ • 16 QAM ✔
Channel State • IRD ✔ • 8 PSK ✔
Compatible
Symbol Rate • (Variable) ✔
• STRATA ✔
Compatible Forward Error • 1/2 ✔
Correction • 2/3 ✔
FMT
Video Deviation • 3 MHz ✔ • 3/4 ✔
• 4 MHz ✔ • 5/6 ✔
Audio Channel 1 • 4830 kHz ✔ • 7/8 ✔
thru 4 • 5200 kHz ✔ Roll Off Factor • 0.25 ✔
Frequency • 0.35 ✔
• 5800 kHz ✔
• 6200 kHz ✔ IF Frequency • (Variable) ✔
• 6800 kHz ✔
• 7020 kHz ✔
• 7500 kHz ✔
• 8065 kHz ✔
• 8300 kHz ✔
• 8590 kHz ✔
Audio Channel • Selected ✔
Frequency • Not selected ✔
Enabled

4 Troubleshooting 4.2 Status LED
Above the PWR switch on both the TXU and TCU is a multi-color
Status LED. The LED indications are listed in Table 4-1.
This chapter describes how to troubleshoot your STRATA TX
System. Table 4-1: Status LED Indications
Here are the topics covered: LED

Meaning Suggested Action
Color
----- Power is not on in that unit. Turn on power, as
Topic Page required.
Status LED 4-1 Green Power is on and no errors None.
Display Messages 4-2 are detected.
Error Codes 4-3 Amber Alarm - Power is on but Check Monitor Screens
some part of the system for error messages or
Operational Problems 4-10 reports an abnormal Error Codes.
condition that requires Troubleshoot using
attention. Condition might tables in this chapter.
impair performance.
Red Major Alarm - Power is on Turn off unit and
but there is a serious failure disconnect power.
or error that will prevent Call MRC Technical
normal operation. The Support.
internal processors are not
running.
WARNING A Major Alarm may also indicate a

potential safety hazard. Shut down the
STRATA TX System and disconnect power.
STRATA TX Operator’s Guide/Tech Ref Manual Troubleshooting 4-1

4.3 Display Messages when they appear. .
One of the ways the STRATA TX System will alert you to

problems is by error messages on the TXU and/or TCU front
panel displays. These are displayed on the Monitor Screens.
See Table 4-2 for descriptions of the messages and what to do
Table 4-2: Display Messages
Message Meaning Suggested Operator Action Suggested Technical Staff Action

Not On Chnl Channel frequencies Contact technical staff. • Use STRATA TX Configuration Utility to
defined in the Channel check settings. Check the Channel
Plan for that band are not Plan to be sure it is correct. Verify
being recognized. Channel Plan matches the transmitter
settings.
• If message persists even when
operating on a frequency that matches
the channel plan, unit may have
suffered internal failure. Call MRC
Technical Support.
No Video The TX System is unable • Check cable connection between • Use STRATA TX Configuration Utility to
to lock on video signal. antenna and TX System. check settings.
• Check cable connection between TXU • If message persists, unit may have
and TCU. suffered internal failure. Call MRC
• Contact technical staff. Technical Support.

4.4 Error Codes Figure 4-1: Error Code Format
The STRATA TX System has an extensive library of diagnostic Primary Error Code
Error Codes to help you pinpoint any problems.
Identifies error condition.
These Error Codes: See Section 4.4.1 .
• Are displayed on the front panel display, on the Error
Code Screen.
• Cause the Status LED to glow amber, alerting you to
investigate the problem.
E141 41
The Error Codes are formatted into 2 groups of characters, as
described in Figure 4-1.
4.4.1 Primary Error Code Error Status Unit ID

The first group of characters is the Primary Error Code. In most Depends on Identifies unit
cases this portion of the Error Code will uniquely identify the error code. reporting error.
problem. See Section 4.4.2 See Section 4.4.3
See Table 4-3 on page 4-4 for descriptions of the error codes on page 4-10. on page 4-10.
and what to do when they appear.

Table 4-3: Primary Error Codes
Error Code Meaning Suggested Operator Action Suggested Technical Staff Action
Status Errors
(Some part of System is reporting an abnormal condition.)
E020 TXU IF Fault • Verify condition of all cable Call MRC Technical Support.
connections.
• Contact technical staff.
E021 TXU RF Fault • Verify condition of all cable Call MRC Technical Support.
connections.
E0E0 FMT Video PLL Unlocked Note - This error will appear only if the TX • Verify video input is at the correct
System contains the FMT option. level.
• Contact technical staff. • Call MRC Technical Support.
E0E1 FMT Audio 1 PLL Unlocked Note - These errors will appear only if the • Use STRATA TX Configuration Utility
E0E2 FMT Audio 2 PLL Unlocked TX System contains the FMT option. to check FMT settings. Be sure all
• Check FMT settings using Monitor settings match the transmitter
E0E3 FMT Audio 3 PLL Unlocked settings and correct as required.
Screens and Command Screens.
E0E4 FMT Audio 4 PLL Unlocked Settings must match transmitter • Use STRATA TX Configuration Utility
settings. to check FMT settings in the radio
• Contact technical staff. and re-program FMT settings only.
• If problem persists, possible
hardware failure. Call MRC Technical
Support.

Table 4-3: Primary Error Codes (Continued)
E080 Communication Failure with the Note - This error will appear only if the TX If problem persists, possible hardware
COFDM/MPEG Unit System contains the COFDM/MPEG failure. Call MRC Technical Support.
option.
• If the TX System contains a
standalone TXU or TCU, contact
technical staff.
• If the TX System contains both a TXU
and a TCU, verify condition of cable
connections. Contact technical staff.
Parameter Errors
(Some internal parameter is outside of allowable limits.)
E030 TXU 2.048 Volt Reference Error • Check for Error Codes related to If errors persist with correct power
E031 TXU 5.5 Volt Reference Error power - E035 thru E039 and E03A connected, unit has suffered internal
thru E03E. failure. Call MRC Technical Support.
E032 TXU 7 Volt Line Error
• Check connection of coax cable
E033 TXU 11 Volt Line Error
between TCU and TXU. Verify
connectors are fully mated and verify
cable and connectors are
undamaged.
• Make sure all power cables are
connected properly.
E034 TXU Temperature Error • Check TXU to be sure it is not too If errors persist with proper location and
close to sources of heat. Relocate airflow and correct power is connected,
TXU, if possible. unit has suffered internal failure. Call
• Verify TXU has room around it for air MRC Technical Support.
circulation. Move objects preventing
air flow.

E035 TXU 75 Ohm Coax Current Error Note - these errors can only appear in a If errors persist with correct coax
E036 TXU 75 Ohm Coax Voltage error TX System with TXU and a TCU, when connections and correct power
powering the TXU from the TCU or from connected, unit has suffered internal
E037 TXU 75 Ohm Coax Power Error the TCU to the TXU via DC power failure. Call MRC Technical Support.
E038 TXU 50 Ohm Coax Current Error superimposed on the coax cable
E039 TXU 50 Ohm Coax Voltage error between the TCU and the TXU.
E03A TXU 50 Ohm Coax Power Error • Check connection of coax cable
undamaged.
connected properly.
E03B TXU Circular Connector Current • Verify all power cables are properly If errors persist with correct power
Error connected and are not damaged. connected, unit has suffered internal
E03C TXU Circular Connector Voltage • Verify correct DC input power is being failure. Call MRC Technical Support.
Error applied to the TXU.
E03D TXU Circular Connector Power • Contact technical staff.
Error
E03E TXU DC Bus Error • Contact technical staff. Call MRC Technical Support.

E040 TCU 2.048 Volt Reference Error • Check for error codes related to If errors persist with correct power
E041 TCU 5.5 Volt Reference Error power - E043 thru E048. connected, unit has suffered internal
• Check connection of coax cable failure. Call MRC Technical Support.
undamaged.
connected properly.
E042 TCU Temperature error • Check TCU to be sure it is not too If errors persist with proper location and
close to sources of heat. Relocate airflow and correct power is connected,
TCU, if possible. unit has suffered internal failure. Call
• Verify TCU has room around it for air MRC Technical Support.
circulation. Move objects preventing
air flow.

E043 TCU 75 Ohm Coax Current Error Note - these errors can only appear in a If errors persist with correct coax
E044 TCU 75 Ohm Coax Voltage Error TX System with TXU and a TCU, when connections and correct power
powering the TXU from the TCU or from connected, unit has suffered internal
E045 TCU 75 Ohm Coax Power Error the TCU to the TXU via DC power failure. Call MRC Technical Support.
superimposed on the coax cable
between the TCU and the TXU.
• Check connection of coax cable
undamaged.
connected properly.
E046 TCU Circular Connector Current • Make sure all power cables are If errors persist with correct power
Error connected properly and are not connected, unit has suffered internal
E047 TCU Circular Connector Voltage damaged. failure. Call MRC Technical Support.
Error • Verify correct DC input power is being
E048 TCU Circular Connector Power applied to the TCU.
Error • Contact technical staff.
E049 TCU DC Bus Error Contact technical staff. Call MRC Technical Support.

E060 HPU PS 48 Volt Line Note - these errors can only appear in a If errors persist with correct coax
E061 HPU PS 5.5 Volt Line TX System with TXU and an HPU, when connections and correct power
powering the HPU via the coax cable connected, unit has suffered internal
E062 HPU PS 11 Volt Line from the TXU. failure. Call MRC Technical Support.
E063 HPU PS Temperature • Check connection of coax cable
E064 HPU PS Coax Current between TXU and HPU. Verify
E065 HPU PS Coax Volt connectors are fully mated and verify
E066 HPU PS Coax Wattage undamaged.
connected properly.
E067 HPU PS Ckt Current Contact technical staff. Call MRC Technical Support.
E068 HPU PS Ckt Voltage
E069 HPU PS Ckt Wattage
E06A HPU PS DC Buss

4.4.2 Error Status 4.5 Operational Problems
The significance of the Error Status digit depends on what Information provided on the following pages will assist you in
Primary Error Code is being reported. See Table 4-4. troubleshooting problems that arise in the operation of your
STRATA TX System.
Table 4-4: Error Status Digit For video problems, See Table 4-6 on page 4-11; for general
system problems, See Table 4-7 on page 4-12.
Status Digit Meaning
Status Error (Error Codes E020, E021, E080, and
E0E0 thru E0E4)
8 There is an error.
Parameter Error (Error Codes E030 thru E039, E03A
thru E03E, and E042 thru E049, E060 thru E069, and
E06A)
4 Value is too low.
8 Value is too high.
4.4.3 Unit ID
The Unit ID digit identifies which part of the STRATA TX System
is reporting a problem. See Table 4-5.
Table 4-5: STRATA Unit ID Digit
Unit ID
1 Transmitter Unit (TXU)
2 Transmitter Control Unit (TCU)
3 High Power Unit (HPU)

Table 4-6: Video Problems
Problem Possible Cause Suggested Operator Action Suggested Technical Staff Action
Video Problems
No video. Problem with video source • Check video source and • Check video source and cabling.
or cabling cabling. • Call MRC Technical Support.
Transmitter and Receiver • Verify Transmitter and • Call MRC Technical Support
compatibility problems Receiver are both operating in
the same digital or analog
modes.
• Verify Transmitter and
Receiver are both operating on
the same frequency. If
frequency offsets are used,
verify offsets are identical
between Transmitter and
Receiver.
Video source configuration • Verify TXU/TCU front panel • Verify video inputs match STRATA TX
problem settings match video source Configuration Utility settings.
inputs. • Call MRC Technical Support.

Table 4-7: General System Problems
Problem Possible Cause Suggested Operator Action Suggested Technical Staff Action
General System Problems
Status LED on TXU/ TX System is indicating a • Check all Monitor Screens on • Error messages: Troubleshoot per
TCU is yellow. Minor Alarm. TXU/TCU display. Section 4.3 on page 4-2.
Troubleshoot per Section 4.3 • Error Codes: Troubleshoot per Section 4.4 on
on page 4-2. page 4-3.
• Check Error Code Screen on
TXU/TCU display.
Troubleshoot per Section 4.4
on page 4-3.
Status LED on TXU or TX System is indicating a TURN OFF POWER and call for Call MRC Technical Support.
TCU is red. Major Alarm. service.
Changing settings on TXU and TCU are not • Check connection between If problem persists with correct coax connections,
one unit doesn’t communicating. TXU and TCU. one or both units have suffered internal failure.
change settings on the • Turn power off in both TXU Call MRC Technical Support.
other in a connected and TCU. Then turn power on
TXU and TCU system. in both TXU and TCU.

5 Advanced Operation Load and Modify Individual Configuration
Pages
5-25
Load and Modify Individual Presets 5-28

5.1 Chapter Overview Create or Update a Channel Plan 5-30
This chapter describes how to use the STRATA TX Configuration Create a New Channel Plan Off-line 5-30
Utility software to configure settings in the STRATA TX System. Load and Modify a Channel Plan from a 5-32
This information is provided and intended for use by the File
technical staff. Load and Modify a Channel Plan from a 5-33
STRATA TX System
Settings that are made using the front panel controls are covered
in the “Routine Operation” Chapter on page 3-1. Program a Channel Plan into a STRATA 5-36
TX System
For a summary of what settings can be made with the front panel
Saving the Configuration to a File 5-39
Control Switch and which are made using the STRATA TX
Configuration Utility, see Chapter 3 “Front Panel vs. STRATA TX COFDM ASI Input Settings 5-39
Configurator Settings” on page 3-42.
Here are the topics covered: 5.2 Before You Begin
Topic Page Before you begin, review the following topics.
Before You Begin 5-1
5.2.1 TX System
TX System 5-1
The procedures described in this chapter assume you already
STRATA TX Configuration Utility 5-1
know how to operate your STRATA TX System. If this is not the
Settings 5-2 case, please review the information presented in the following
System Rules 5-2 Chapters of this manual:
Creating a Configuration 5-2 “Introduction” Chapter on page 1-1
Connection to STRATA TX Configuration 5-3 “Product Description” Chapter on page 2-1
Utility Software “Routine Operation” Chapter on page 3-1
Create a New Configuration 5-5
Load and Modify a Configuration From a 5-19 5.2.2 STRATA TX Configuration Utility
File This chapter also assumes the STRATA TX Configuration Utility
Load and Modify a Configuration From 5-22 software is installed and operating on your PC and that you are
the TX System familiar with its tabs, buttons, pages, etc. If this is not the case,
STRATA TX Technical Reference Manual Advanced Operation 5-1

please review the information presented in the “Configurator 5.3 Creating a Configuration
Reference” Appendix on page C-1.
There are various methods to create or modify STRATA TX
5.2.3 Settings configurations, pages, or individual Preset settings.
Before beginning to create a configuration or program a The STRATA TX System must be connected to the STRATA
configuration into your STRATA TX System, you must define TX Configuration Utility software and the TX system must be
what settings are to be part of the configuration. Please refer to powered up before any settings can be created or modified.
the information presented in the “Configurator Reference” See ”Connection to STRATA TX Configuration Utility Software”
Appendix on page C-1. for the procedure required to connect your STRATA TX System
to the STRATA TX Configuration Utility software and to power
5.2.4 System Rules your TX system up.
When configuring your STRATA TX System, the following The methods used to create or modify configurations, pages, or
system rules must be followed. Presets are as follows:
• The STRATA TX System must be powered up and • Create a new STRATA TX configuration. See ”Create a
connected to the STRATA TX Configuration Utility New Configuration” on page 5-5.
software to create or modify radio configurations, Presets,
and/or files. • Load in an existing configuration from a file and modify it.
See ”Load and Modify a Configuration From a File” on
• The STRATA TX System must be powered up for the page 5-19.
STRATA TX Configuration Utility software to detect the
configuration of your STRATA TX System. • Load in an existing configuration from your STRATA TX
System and modify it. See ”Load and Modify a
• A TXU can contain either an analog FM modulator (FMT) Configuration From the TX System” on page 5-22.
module or a digital modulator and encoder (COFDM and
MPEG) module, but not both modules. If your STRATA • Load in an existing Page configuration from the TX
TX System contains both a TXU and a TCU, the TXU will system and modify it. See ”Load and Modify Individual
not contain either an analog or a digital module and the Configuration Pages” on page 5-25.
TCU will contain the FMT and COFDM and MPEG • Load and modify an individual Preset . See ”Load and
modules. Modify Individual Presets” on page 5-28.
• A TCU may contain either an analog FM modulator (FMT) Each of these methods is explained in more detail in the
module or a digital modulator and encoder (COFDM and following paragraphs.
MPEG) module, both analog and digital modules, or may
not contain either the analog or digital modulator modules.

5.3.1 Connection to STRATA TX Configuration
Utility Software Notes The following steps assume that all interconnecting
coax cables between your STRATA TX System
The procedure required to connect your STRATA TX System to TCU, TXU, and HPU are present and are properly
the STRATA TX Configuration Utility software and to power up connected, as applicable for your particular
the TX system is contained in the following steps. STRATA TX System configuration.
If you are loading a configuration from a

CAUTION Do not make any changes to your STRATA standalone TXU, with or without an optional HPU,
TX System while the TX system is actively go to step 1.
transmitting.
If you are loading a configuration from a
Attempts to make configuration changes to standalone TCU, go to step 5.
your STRATA TX system when your TX
system is transmitting will interrupt If you are loading a configuration from a co-located
broadcast operations. TXU and TCU, with or without an optional HPU, go
to step 9.
If you are loading a configuration from a separately

located TXU and TCU, with or without an optional
HPU, go to step 14.
1. Connect the power cable to the TXU front panel PWR/

RS-485 connector.
2. Connect the RS-232 cable between the TXU rear
panel RS-232 connector and the RS-232 connector on
your PC.
3. Set the TXU front panel PWR switch to the on ( I )
position.
4. Go to step 18.
5. Connect the RS-232 cable between the TCU front
panel RS-232 connector and the RS-232 connector on
your PC.

6. Connect the power cable to the TCU rear panel 12. Set the TXU and TCU front panel PWR switches to the
POWER connector. on ( I ) positions.
7. Set the TCU front panel PWR switch to the on ( I ) 13. Go to step 18.
position. 14. Connect the power cable to the TCU rear panel
8. Go to step 18. POWER connector.
Note The following step reflects use of a single DC Note When configuring a TXU and TCU that are
power source for both the TXU and the TCU in lieu mounted in separate locations and are properly
of using superimposed DC power on the coax connected, the RS-232 cable from the PC may be
cable between the TCU and the TXU. This step connected to either the TXU or the TCU RS-232
assumes DC ON COAX switches, if present on connector.
your TXU and TCU, are set to OFF.
15. Connect the RS-232 cable between either the TXU
For additional information concerning powering a rear panel RS-232 connector or the TCU front panel
co-located TXU and TCU, see Section 3.3.6, TXU RS-232 connector and the RS-232 connector on your
and TCU Power Up and Power Down - Co-Located PC.
on page 3-17.
9. Connect the power cable to the TXU front panel PWR/

Note The following step reflects use of a single DC
power superimposed on the coax cable between
RS-485 connector.
the TCU and the TXU. This step assumes DC ON
10. Connect the power cable to the TCU rear panel COAX switches, if present on your TXU and TCU,
POWER connector. are set to ON.
Note When configuring a TXU and TCU that are co- For additional information concerning powering a
located and properly connected, the RS-232 cable TXU and TCU mounted in separate locations, see
from the PC may be connected to either the TXU or Section 3.3.7, TXU and TCU Power Up and Power
the TCU RS-232 connector. Down - Separate Locations on page 3-18.
11. Connect the RS-232 cable between either the TXU 16. Set the TCU front panel PWR switch to the on ( I )
rear panel RS-232 connector or the TCU front panel position.
RS-232 connector and the RS-232 connector on your 17. Set the TXU front panel PWR switch to the on ( I )
PC. position.

18. Start the STRATA TX Configuration Utility by double- Figure 5-1: Main Page
clicking the STRATA TX User Configurator icon on
your PC’s Desktop.
5.3.2 Create a New Configuration

This procedure allows you to set up a new TX system
configuration. You must be connected to your STRATA TX
System to do this. See Section 5.3.1, Connection to STRATA
TX Configuration Utility Software on page 5-3.
See the “Configurator Reference” Appendix on page C-1 for
details of setting choices on each STRATA TX Configuration
Utility page.
To create a new configuration, perform the following steps:
Note In the following steps, page tabs are active (not
1. Perform “Connection to STRATA TX Configuration greyed out) only for the configuration options
Utility Software” on page 5-3 . contained in your STRATA TX System.
2. Observe the STRATA TX Configuration Utility Main
page is displayed. See Figure 5-1.
3. Select the STRATA Control Connect to Radio option
button. Observe the Connect to Radio option button
label changes to Disconnect Port-X when connection
is complete.
4. Observe the Main page STRATA TXU and STRATA
TCU configuration option buttons and data fields
update to reflect the STRATA TX System hardware
and hardware versions detected. See Figure 5-2 on
page 5-6.

Figure 5-2: Main Page Configuration Options - Typical
Note Perform steps 6 thru 10 for each Preset setting to
be changed, as required.
If no Preset names are to be changed in the

following step, go to step 7.
6. Use the mouse to highlight the Preset Name text box

to be changed and enter the new name (12
alphanumeric characters maximum). See Figure 5-4.
Figure 5-4: Change Preset Name - Typical
5. Select the Radio tab and observe the Radio page is

displayed. See Figure 5-3.
Figure 5-3: Radio Page - Typical

Note Operation modes may only be selected for options Note In the following step, Color Bars options may only
contained in your TX system. be selected for Presets with valid operation modes
of MPEG IF Out, MPEG ASI-Out, COFDM-ASI In,
If an invalid Operation Mode is selected in the and DVB-Satellite. Note that the DVB-Satellite
following step, an Invalid Operation Mode option may only be selected if your TX System
message box will be displayed. See Figure 5-5. consists of a standalone TCU.
Select the OK button and select a valid Operation
Mode option, as required. Perform the following step for each Preset with a
valid operation mode, as required. If no Color
If no operation modes are to be changed, go to Bars options are to be changed, go to step 9.
step 8.
8. Select the Preset Color Bars option required using
the Color Bars pull-down menu(s), as required. See
Figure 5-5: Invalid Operation Mode Message Box - Typical Figure 5-7.
Figure 5-7: Color Bars Pull-Down Menu - Typical
7. Select the Preset operation mode using the

Operation Mode pull-down menu(s), as required.
See Figure 5-6.
Note In the following step, IF/CW Tone options may be
Figure 5-6: Operation Mode Options selected for Presets with MPEG IF Out and
COFDM-ASI In operating modes only.
Perform the following step for each Preset with a

valid operation mode, as required.
If no IF/CW Tone options are to be changed, go to

step 10.

9. Select the Preset IF/CW Tone option button to select Figure 5-9: Back Off Attenuation - Typical
OFF or ON, as required. See Figure 5-8.
Figure 5-8: IF/CW Tone Option Buttons - Typical
Note Perform steps 11 thru 15 for each active Preset to

Settings on the COFDM page may be changed

only for Presets that are active (not greyed out).
11. Select the COFDM tab and observe the COFDM Page
is displayed. See Figure 5-10.
Figure 5-10: COFDM Page - Typical
Note Perform the following step to enter back off

attenuation levels for each Preset, as required.
If no Back Off attenuation levels are to be

changed, go to step 11.
10. Use the mouse to highlight the Back Off text box to be
changed and enter the new attenuation level (range is
0 to 31 dB), as required. See Figure 5-9.

Note For each Preset with a Radio page Operation Note Perform the following step to select Bandwidth
Mode of COFDM ASI In, the actual ASI input bit options for each active Preset, as required.
rate must be used to determine Modulation,
Bandwidth, FEC, and Guard menu option If no Bandwidth options are to be changed, go to
settings. step 14.
Refer to “COFDM ASI Input Settings” on page 5-39 13. Select the Preset Bandwidth option required using
to determine the proper Modulation, Bandwidth, the Bandwidth pull-down menu(s), as required. See
FEC, and Guard menu option settings before Figure 5-12.
performing the following steps.
Figure 5-12: Bandwidth Pull-Down Menu - Typical
Note Perform the following step to select Modulation

options for each active Preset, as required.
If no Modulation options are to be changed, go to

step 13.
12. Select the Preset Modulation option required using Note Perform the following step to select Forward Error
the Modulation pull-down menu(s), as required. See Correction (FEC) options for each active Preset, as
Figure 5-11. required.
Figure 5-11: Modulation Pull-Down Menu - Typical If no FEC options are to be changed, go to step 15.
14. Select the Preset FEC option required using the FEC
pull-down menu(s), as required. See Figure 5-13.
Figure 5-13: FEC Pull-Down Menu - Typical

Figure 5-15: MPEG Page - Typical
Note Perform the following step to select Guard options
for each active Preset, as required.
If no Guard options are to be changed, go to step

16.
15. Select the Preset Guard option required using the

Guard pull-down menu(s), as required. See Figure 5-
14.
Figure 5-14: Guard Pull-Down menu - Typical
17. Select the active Preset required.

18. Use the mouse to highlight the Service: name text box
Note Perform steps 16 thru 40 for each active Preset to and enter the new Service: name (12 alphanumeric
be changed, as required. characters maximum). See Figure 5-16.
Settings on the MPEG page may be changed only Figure 5-16: Video/Provider Service and Network Names
for Presets that are active (not greyed out).
16. Select the MPEG tab and observe the MPEG page is
Note Perform steps 17 thru 23 to change the Video/

Provider option settings for each active Preset, as
required.
If no Video Provider settings are to be changed,

go to step 24.

19. Use the mouse to highlight the Network: name text Figure 5-19: Video/Provider Chroma Pull-Down Menu
box and enter the new Network: name (12
alphanumeric characters maximum). See Figure 5-16
on page 5-10.
20. Select the Input: required using the Input: pull-down
menu. See Figure 5-17.
Figure 5-17: Video/Provider Input Pull-Down Menu

Note In the following step, the ASI Rate: text box is
active only for a Preset with an Operating Mode of
MPEG-ASI Out.
If the ASI Rate: option is not active (greyed-out),

go to step 24.
23. Use the mouse to select the ASI Rate: text box and
21. Select the Delay: required using the Delay: pull-down enter the ASI Rate: value required (range is 0.000 to
menu. See Figure 5-18. 15.000 Mb/s). See Figure 5-20.
Figure 5-18: Video/Provider Delay Pull-Down Menu Figure 5-20: Video/Provider ASI Rate Text Box
22. Select the Chroma: setting required using the

Chroma: pull-down menu. See Figure 5-19.
Note Perform steps 24 and 25 for each applicable active
Preset, only if Wayside is to be enabled.

24. Select the Wayside State: setting required using the
State: pull-down menu. See Figure 5-21. Note In the following steps, Basic Interoperable
Scrambling System (BISS) encryption is a factory-
Figure 5-21: Wayside State Pull-Down Menu enabled option that must be ordered when you
order your TX system.
Perform steps 26 thru 36 for each active Preset, as

required.
If you do not have the BISS option, go to step 37.
26. Select the BISS Encryption Type: option required

using the Type: pull-down menu. See Figure 5-23.
Note In the following step, the Baud: rate option is
Figure 5-23: BISS Encryption Type Pull-Down Menu
active (not greyed-out) only if the Wayside State:
IRD Compatible or Strata Compatible options are
selected.
25. Select the Wayside Baud: rate setting required using

the Baud: pull-down menu. See Figure 5-22.
Figure 5-22: Wayside Baud Rate Pull-Down Menu

Note If you selected the BISS Encryption Type: OFF
option in step 26, go to step 29.
If you selected the BISS Encryption Type: BISS-1

option in step 26, go to step 27.
If you selected the BISS Encryption Type: BISS-

E option in step 26, go to step 28.
27. Observe the BISS Encryption 1 Key: option is active,

use the mouse to select the 1 Key: text box, enter
your 1 Key: data, as required (12 digits maximum),
and go to step 28. See Figure 5-24 on page 5-13.

Figure 5-24: BISS Encryption 1 Key Figure 5-26: PID Information options
28. Observe the BISS Encryption E Key: and E ID:

options are active, enter your E Key: data (16 digits
maximum) and E ID: data (14 digits maximum), as 30. Enter/modify the PID Info PCR: text box, as required
required, and go to step 29. See Figure 5-25. (4 digits maximum). The range is 32 to 8190.
31. Enter/modify the PID Info DAT: text box, as required
Figure 5-25: BISS Encryption E Key (4 digits maximum). The range is 32 to 8190.
32. Enter/modify the PID Info VID: text box, as required (4
digits maximum). The range is 32 to 8190.
33. Enter/modify the PID Info AUD-A: text box, as
required (4 digits maximum). The range is 32 to 8190.
34. Enter/modify the PID Info AUD-B: text box, as
required (4 digits maximum). The range is 32 to 8190.
Note If the Default PID: option box is checked in the
following step, go to step 35.
Note In the following step, the Linear option requires a
license to activate the option. If your TX system
If the PID ID: option box is not checked in the was not factory-configured with the Linear option,
following step, go to step 30. only the OFF and MPEG options can be selected.
When entering PID information in the following The Linear option Mode and Input option
steps, PIDs must be unique and must not be selections are identical to those shown in steps 36
duplicated. and 37.
29. Use the mouse to select the PID Info Default ID: If the OFF option is selected in the following step.
option box, as required. See Figure 5-26. go to step 38.

35. Select the Audio A Type: pull-down menu and select
OFF, MPEG, or Linear. See Figure 5-27. Note In the following step, the Linear option requires a
license to activate the option. If your TX system
Figure 5-27: Audio A Type Selection was not factory-configured with the Linear option,
only the OFF and MPEG options can be selected.
The Linear option Mode and Input option

selections are identical to those shown in steps 39
and 40.
If the OFF option is selected in the following step.

36. Select the Audio A Mode: pull-down menu and select go to step 41.
Stereo or Dual Mono. See Figure 5-28.
38. Select the Audio B Type: pull-down menu and select
Figure 5-28: Audio A Mode Selection OFF, MPEG, or Linear. See Figure 5-30.
Figure 5-30: Audio B Type Selection
37. Select the Audio A Input: pull-down menu and select

Test Tone, Analog, SDI EMB, or AES EBU. See
Figure 5-29. Note that AES EBU is optional and must 39. Select the Audio B Mode: pull-down menu and select
be factory-enabled. Stereo or Dual Mono. See Figure 5-31.
Figure 5-29: Audio A Input Selection Figure 5-31: Audio B Mode Selection

40. Select the Audio B Input: pull-down menu and select 42. Observe that only Presets for which the Radio page
Test Tone, Analog, SDI EMB, or AES EBU. See Operation Mode Analog IF Out option was selected
Figure 5-32. Note that AES EBU is optional and must are active (not greyed-out).
be factory-enabled.
Figure 5-32: Audio B Input Selection

Note Perform steps 43 thru 47 for each active Preset to
Settings on the FMT page may be changed only for

Presets that are active (not greyed out).
43. Select the required active Preset. See Figure 5-34.
Figure 5-34: Active FMT Preset - Typical

41. Select the FMT tab and observe the FMT page is
Figure 5-33: FMT Page - Typical
44. Select the Video Deviation 3 MHz or 4 MHz option

button for the corresponding Preset, as required.

Figure 5-36: Audio Sub-Carrier Channel Frequency Pull-
Note In the following steps, the Enable Channel 1 thru Down Menu
Enable Channel 4 option boxes must be enabled
for the corresponding Frequency and Pre-
Emphasis options to be active (not greyed out).
45. Select the active Audio Sub-Carrier Enable Channel

1 thru Enable Channel 4 option boxes, as required.
See Figure 5-35.
Figure 5-35: Audio Sub-Carrier Enable Channel Options
47. Select the active Audio Sub-Carrier Enable Channel

1 thru Enable Channel 4 Pre-Emphasis option
boxes, as required. See Figure 5-37.
Figure 5-37: Enable Channel 4 Pre-Emphasis Option -

Typical
46. Select each active Audio Sub-Carrier Enable

Channel X Frequency pull-down menu and select
4830 kHz, 5200 kHz, 5800 kHz, 6200 kHz, 6800 kHz,
7020 kHz, 7500 kHz, 8065 kHz, 8300 kHz, or 8590
kHz, as required. See Figure 5-36.

49. Observe only the Presets for which the Radio page
Note The DVBS tab is active only if the Radio page Operation Mode DVB-Satellite option was selected
Preset DVB-Satellite operation mode was are active (not greyed-out). See Figure 5-39.
selected and your TX System consists of a
standalone TCU. Figure 5-39: DVBS Active Presets - Typical
Perform steps 48 thru 54 for each active Preset to

Settings on the DVBS page may be changed only

for Presets that are active (not greyed out).
If a DVB-Satellite operation mode was not

selected, go to step 55.
48. Select the DVBS tab and observe the DVBS page is
Figure 5-38: DVBS Page - Typical
Note A special license and factory activation is required

to use 16 QAM and 8 PSK modulation types.
If your STRATA TX System, does not contain this

option, the only modulation type available is
QPSK.
50. Select the Modulation QPSK, 16 QAM, or 8 PSK

option for the corresponding active Preset using the
Modulation pull-down menu. See Figure 5-40 on
page 5-18.

Figure 5-40: DVBS Modulation Options - Typical Figure 5-42: Forward Error Correction Options
51. Use mouse to highlight the Symbol rate text box for
the corresponding active Preset and enter the Symbol
53. Select the Roll Off 0.35 or 0.25 option for the
rate required for the Preset. The Symbol rate range is
corresponding active Preset using the Roll Off pull-
1.7 to 26.7. See Figure 5-41.
down menu. See Figure 5-43.
Figure 5-41: DVBS Symbol Rate Settings - Typical
Figure 5-43: Roll Off Options
52. Select the Forward Error Correction (FEC) 1/2, 2/3,

3/4, 5/6, or 7/8 option using the FEC pull-down menu.
See Figure 5-42.
54. Use mouse to highlight the IF Frequency text box for
the corresponding active Preset and enter the IF
Frequency required for the Preset. The IF
Frequency range is 59.2 to 80.8. See Figure 5-44 on
page 5-19.

Figure 5-44: IF Frequency Settings 57. When your configuration is complete, save it to a file.
See Section 5.5, Saving the Configuration to a File on
page 5-39.
58. Close the STRATA TX Configuration Utility window.
59. Power down your STRATA TX system and disconnect
the RS-232 cable between the TX system and the RS-
232 connector on your PC.
5.3.3 Load and Modify a Configuration From a

55. Select the Chan Plan tab and observe the Chan Plan File
Loading a configuration from a file allows you to modify an
Figure 5-45: Chan Plan Page - Typical existing configuration. The configuration can then be saved to a
file or can be loaded into the STRATA TX System.
You must be connected to your STRATA TX System to do this.
See Section 5.3.1, Connection to STRATA TX Configuration
Utility Software on page 5-3.
To load a configuration from a file and modify the file, perform the
following steps:
1. Perform “Connection to STRATA TX Configuration
Utility Software” on page 5-3 .
page is displayed. See Figure 5-46 on page 5-20.
56. Use the mouse to select Channel 1 thru Channel 10

Offset -, Center, and Offset + text boxes and enter
channel plan frequencies for each channel, as
required. The value ranges are 1990.000 to
2500.000.

Figure 5-46: Main Page Figure 5-47: STRATA Control Option Buttons
5. After a short delay, observe the STRATA TXU,

STRATA TCU, or both the STRATA TXU and STRATA
3. Select the STRATA Control Connect to Radio option TCU option buttons are active (highlighted), as
button. required, indicating the configuration of your TX
system. See Figure 5-48.
Note When connecting to the TX system, a progress bar Figure 5-48: STRATA TXU Option Buttons - Typical
will be displayed at the top of the Main page.
4. Observe the Connect to Radio option button changes

to read Disconnect Port-X, where X is the COM port
on your PC. See Figure 5-47. When connection is
complete, go to the following step.

6. Select the STRATA Control Load Settings from File
option button and observe the Load a Strata TX Note Changes are not automatically loaded into your
Configuration File window is displayed. See STRATA TX System unless you select the Main
Figure 5-49. page STRATA Control Program Radio option
button.
Figure 5-49: Load a Strata Configuration File Window -
Typical If you want to load the new configuration into your
STRATA TX System, go to step 11.
If you do not want to load the new configuration

into your STRATA TX System, go to step 15.
11. When all changes have been completed, select the

Main tab and observe the Main page is displayed.
Note When programming your STRATA TX System in

the following steps, a progress bar will be
displayed near the top of the Main page.
12. Select the STRATA Control Program Radio option

button. See Figure 5-50.
Figure 5-50: STRATA TX Control Option Buttons
7. Navigate to the file required in the Load a Strata TX

Configuration File window and select it.
8. Select the Open option button.
9. Observe the Load a Strata TX Configuration File
window closes.
10. Select each tab and make your choices for settings on
that page.
See the “Configurator Reference” Appendix on

page C-1 for details of choices on each page.

13. Observe the STRATA Control Program Radio option 5.3.4 Load and Modify a Configuration From the
button label changes to read Programming, then TX System
reads Verifying, and finally reads Program Radio
when programming is complete. See Figure 5-51. If the existing configuration programmed into your STRATA TX
System needs changes, you can load that configuration into the
Figure 5-51: STRATA Control Programming Main Page - STRATA TX Configuration Utility and modify it. The
Typical configuration can then be saved to a file or can be loaded into
the STRATA TX System.
Figure 5-52: Main Page - No Radio Connected
14. When your configuration is complete, save it to a file.

page 5-39.
15. Select the STRATA Control Disconnect Port-X
option button and observe the button label changes to
read Connect to Radio.

3. Select the STRATA Control Connect to Radio option 5. Select the STRATA Control Load Settings from
button. Observe the Connect to Radio option button Radio option button. See Figure 5-54.
label changes to Disconnect Port-X when connection
is complete. Figure 5-54: STRATA Control Option Buttons
4. After a short delay, observe the Main page STRATA
TXU and STRATA TCU configuration option buttons
and data fields update to reflect the STRATA TX
System hardware and hardware versions detected.
See Figure 5-53.
Figure 5-53: Main Page Configuration Options - Typical
6. Observe the Load Settings from Radio option button

label changes to read Loading while configuration
settings are being read from the STRATA TX System.
When loading is complete, go to the following step.
7. Select each tab and make your choices for settings on
that page.
See ”Configurator Reference” on page C-1 for details

of choices on each page.
Note It will take several minutes for the STRATA TX
Configuration Utility software to read the settings
from your STRATA TX System.
When loading settings from the radio, a progress

bar will be displayed near the top of the Main page.

10. Observe the STRATA Control Program Radio option
Note Changes are not automatically loaded into your button label changes to read Programming, then
STRATA TX System unless you select the Main reads Verifying, and finally reads Program Radio
page STRATA Control Program Radio option when programming is complete. See Figure 5-56.
button.
Figure 5-56: STRATA Control Programming Main Page -
If you want to load the new configuration into your Typical
If you do not want to load the new configuration

8. When all changes have been completed, select the

Main tab and observe the Main page is displayed.
Note When programming your STRATA TX System in

the following steps, a progress bar will be
9. Select the STRATA Control Program Radio option

button. See Figure 5-55.
Figure 5-55: STRATA TX Control Option Buttons 11. When your configuration is complete, save it to a file.
page 5-39.
option button and observe the button label changes to

5.3.5 Load and Modify Individual Configuration Table 5-1: STRATA TX System Configuration Utility Option
Pages Buttons (Continued)
If the configuration programmed into your STRATA TX System Page Option Button Action
requires minor changes, you can load individual STRATA TX
DVBS Load Page Loads DVBS page settings only
Configuration Utility software pages, modify them, and save to a
from STRATA TX System.
file or load the changes into the STRATA TX System.
Program Page Programs DVBS page settings
Please note that the Load and Program option buttons on the only into STRATA TX System.
individual Radio, COFDM, MPEG, FMT, and DVBS pages load
or program changes to/from that particular page only. Changes To load and modify individual STRATA TX Configuration Utility
made to other pages are not automatically loaded from or software pages from the STRATA TX System, perform the
programmed into the system. Descriptions of the STRATA TX following steps:
System Configuration Utility software page option buttons are You must be connected to your STRATA TX System to do this.
described in Table 5-1. See Section 5.3.1, Connection to STRATA TX Configuration
Table 5-1: STRATA TX System Configuration Utility Option Utility Software on page 5-3.
Buttons 1. Perform “Connection to STRATA TX Configuration
Page Option Button Action
2. Observe the Main page is displayed. See Figure 5-
Radio Load Page Loads Radio page settings only 57.
Program Page Programs Radio page settings Figure 5-57: Main Page
only into STRATA TX System.
COFDM Load Page Loads COFDM page settings
only from STRATA TX System.
Program Page Programs COFDM page settings
MPEG Load Page Loads MPEG page settings only
Prog Page Programs MPEG page settings
FMT Load Page Loads FMT page settings only
Program Page Programs FMT page settings

3. Select the STRATA Control Connect to Radio option Figure 5-59: STRATA TX Configuration Option Buttons -
button. Typical
Note When connecting to the radio, a progress bar will

be displayed at the top of the Main page indicating
the connection progress.
4. Observe the Connect to Radio option button changes

to read Disconnect Port-X. See Figure 5-58. When
connection is complete, go to the following step.
Figure 5-58: STRATA Control Option Buttons
6. Select the STRATA TX Configuration Utility Radio,

COFDM, MPEG, FMT, or DVBS tab, as required, and
observe the corresponding page is displayed.
Notes It will take several minutes for the STRATA TX

Configuration Utility software to read the settings
from your STRATA TX System after the Load Page
option button is selected.
STRATA TCU, or both the STRATA TXU and STRATA When loading settings from the radio in the
TCU configuration option buttons and data fields following step, a progress bar will be displayed at
update to reflect the STRATA TX System hardware the top of the Main page.
and hardware versions detected. See Figure 5-59.
7. Select the Load Page option button.
8. Observe Load Page option button label changes to
read Loading while configuration settings are being
read from the STRATA TX System. When loading is

9. Make your setting changes on the Radio, COFDM, 11. Select the Program Page option button.
MPEG, FMT, or DVBS page, as required. 12. Observe the Program Page option button label
changes to read Programming, then reads Verifying,
See ”Configurator Reference” on page C-1 for details and finally reads Program Page when programming is
of choices on each page. complete.
10. When your configuration is complete, save it to a file. 13. Select the Main tab and observe the Main page is
displayed.
See Section 5.5, Saving the Configuration to a File on 14. Select the STRATA Control Disconnect Port-X
page 5-39. option button. See Figure 5-61.
Notes If configuration changes are not to be loaded into Figure 5-61: STRATA TX System Control Option Buttons
your STRATA TX System at this time, go to step
13.
If errors are encountered when loading

configurations into the STRATA TX System, error
message windows will be displayed. See Figure 5-
60. Select the OK option button to clear the error
message window(s).
Figure 5-60: Error Message Window - Typical
15. Observe the Disconnect Port-X option button

changes to read Connect to Radio.
Note When programming the Radio, COFDM, MPEG, 17. Power down your STRATA TX system and disconnect
FMT, or DVBS page in the following step, a the RS-232 cable between the TX system and the RS-
progress bar will be displayed at the top of the 232 connector on your PC.
page and the STRATA TX System alphanumeric
display will display the current Preset number
being programmed.

5.3.6 Load and Modify Individual Presets 4. Observe the Connect to Radio option button label
changes to read Disconnect Port-X. See Figure 5-
The procedure required to load and modify an individual Preset
63. When connection is complete, go to the following
is contained in the following steps.
step.
See Section 5.3.1, Connection to STRATA TX Configuration Figure 5-63: STRATA Control Option Buttons
Utility Software” on page 5-3.
62.
Figure 5-62: Main Page

TCU configuration option buttons and data fields
update to reflect the STRATA TX System hardware
and hardware versions detected. See Figure 5-64 on
page 5-29.
6. Make your Preset setting changes on the Radio,
COFDM, MPEG, FMT, or DVBS page, as required.
button. See ”Configurator Reference” on page C-1 for details
of choices on each page.


Figure 5-64: STRATA TX Configuration Option Buttons -
Typical Note If you want to load the new Preset configuration
If you do not want to load the new Preset

configuration into your STRATA TX System but
wish to save the Preset changes to a file, go to
step 12.
9. When all Preset changes have been completed, select

the Main tab and observe the Main page is displayed.
Note When programming the Preset changes into your

STRATA TX System in the following steps, a
progress bar will be displayed near the top of the
Main page.
7. When your Preset configuration is complete, select the
Main tab. 10. Select the STRATA Control Program Preset option
8. Select the STRATA Control Preset pull-down menu button. See Figure 5-66.
and select the Preset to be programmed. See
Figure 5-65. Figure 5-66: STRATA TX Control Option Buttons
Figure 5-65: STRATA Control Preset Pull-Down Menu

11. Observe the STRATA Control Program Preset 5.4 Create or Update a Channel Plan
option button label changes to read Programming,
then reads Verifying, and finally reads Program There are two ways to create a channel plan offline.
Preset when programming is complete. See Figure 5- • Create a new configuration offline from scratch. See
67. ”Create a New Channel Plan Off-line” .
Figure 5-67: STRATA Control Preset Programming - Typical • Load in an existing channel plan from a file and modify it.
See ”Load and Modify a Channel Plan from a File” on
page 5-32.
You may also create or modify a channel plan on-line with your
STRATA TX System connected to a PC via an RS-232 link.
• Load in a channel plan from the STRATA TX System and
modify it. See ”Load and Modify a Channel Plan from a
STRATA TX System” on page 5-33.
You may also program a channel plan into your STRATA TX
System. See ”Program a Channel Plan into a STRATA TX
System” on page 5-36.
5.4.1 Create a New Channel Plan Off-line

The procedure required to prepare a new channel plan without
having your PC connected to the STRATA TX System is
12. When your configuration is complete, save it to a file. contained in the following steps. See ”Configurator Reference”
See Section 5.5, Saving the Configuration to a File on on page C-1 for details of choices on channel plan options.
page 5-39.
1. Start the STRATA TX Configuration Utility software by
13. Select the STRATA Control Disconnect Port-X double-clicking the STRATA TX Configuration Utility
option button and observe the button label changes to icon on your PC’s desktop.
2. Observe the Main page is displayed. See Figure 5-68
14. Close the STRATA TX Configuration Utility window. on page 5-31.
15. Power down your STRATA TX system and disconnect 3. Select the STRATA TXU TXU DCC, TXU Front
the RS-232 cable between the TX system and the RS- Panel, and IF/RF option buttons and observe the
232 connector on your PC. Chan Plan tab is active (not greyed-out).

Figure 5-68: Main Page 5. Use the mouse to select Channel 1 thru Channel 10
2500.000.
6. Select the Save File option button and observe the
Save Channel Plan window is displayed. See
Figure 5-70.
Figure 5-70: Save Channel Plan Window
4. Select the Chan Plan tab and observe the Chan Plan
Figure 5-69: Channel Plan Page
7. Enter a file name in the File name: text box.
Keep in mind that different versions of Windows have

different rules for naming files.
8. Select the Save option button. Observe the Save
Channel Plan window is no longer displayed.

5.4.2 Load and Modify a Channel Plan from a File 3. Select the Chan Plan tab and observe the Chan Plan
This procedure allows you to modify an existing channel plan
without having your PC connected to the STRATA TX System.
Figure 5-72: Chan Plan Page - Typical
See ”Configurator Reference” on page C-1 for details on
STRATA TX Configuration Utility channel plan options.
The procedure required to load a channel plan from a file and to
modify the channel plan is contained in the following steps:
1. Start the STRATA TX Configuration Utility software by
double-clicking the STRATA TX Configuration Utility
icon on your PC’s Desktop.

71.
4. Select the Load File option button and observe the
Figure 5-71: Main Page Load Channel Plan window is displayed. See
5. Use the mouse to select Channel 1 thru Channel 10
2500.000.
6. Select the Save File option button and observe the
Save Channel Plan window is displayed. See

Figure 5-73: Load Channel Plan Window 7. Enter a file name in the File name: text box.

5.4.3 Load and Modify a Channel Plan from a

STRATA TX System
If the existing channel plan programmed into your STRATA TX
requires changes, you can load that channel plan into the
STRATA TX Configuration Utility software and modify it.
See ”Configurator Reference” on page C-1 for details on
STRATA TX Configuration Utility channel plan options.
Figure 5-74: Save Channel Plan Window You must be connected to your STRATA TX System to do this.
To load and modify a channel plan from the STRATA TX System,
perform the following steps:
Utility Software” on page 5-3.
2. Observe the Main page is displayed. See Figure 5-75
on page 5-34.
button.


Figure 5-75: Main Page 5. After a short delay, observe the STRATA TXU,
TCU configuration option buttons are active
(highlighted) and the software versions of the installed
hardware are displayed. See Figure 5-77.

Typical
4. Observe the Connect to Radio option button label

changes to read Disconnect Port-X. See Figure 5-
76. When connection is complete, go to the following
step.
Figure 5-76: STRATA Control Option Buttons
6. Select the Chan Plan tab and observe the Chan Plan
page is displayed. See Figure 5-78 on page 5-35.
7. Select the Load Page option button. See Figure 5-79
on page 5-35.

Figure 5-78: Chan Plan Page - Typical 9. Use the mouse to select Channel 1 thru Channel 10
2500.000.
10. Select the Save Settings to File option button and
observe the Save Channel Plan window is displayed.
See Figure 5-80.
Figure 5-80: Save Channel Plan Window
Figure 5-79: Channel Plan Option Buttons
11. Enter a file name in the File name: text box.

8. Observe Load Page option button changes to read
Loading while configuration settings are being read
from the STRATA TX System. When loading is

To program a channel plan into the STRATA TX System, perform
Note If channel plan changes are to be loaded into the the following:
If channel plan changes are not to be loaded into Utility Software” on page 5-3.
the STRATA TX System at this time, go to step 15. 2. Observe the Main page is displayed. See Figure 5-
81.
13. Select the Program Page option button.
14. Observe the Program Page option button changes to Figure 5-81: Main Page
read Programming, then reads Verifying, and finally
reads Program Page when the programming is
complete.
15. Select the Main tab and observe the Main page is
displayed.
option button.
17. Observe the Disconnect Port-X option button
changes to read Connect to Radio.
18. Close the STRATA TX System Configuration Utility
window.
5.4.4 Program a Channel Plan into a STRATA TX be displayed at the top of the Main page indicating
System
The procedure required to load a channel plan from a file on your 3. Select the STRATA Control Connect to Radio option
PC and to load it into your STRATA TX System is contained in button.
the following steps. 4. Observe the Connect to Radio option button label
You must be connected to your STRATA TX System to do this. changes to read Disconnect Port-X. See Figure 5-82
See Section 5.3.1, Connection to STRATA TX Configuration on page 5-37. When connection is complete, go to the
Utility Software on page 5-3. following step.

Figure 5-82: STRATA Control Option Buttons 6. Select the Chan Plan tab and observe the Chan Plan
Figure 5-84: Chan Plan Page - Typical

TCU configuration option buttons are active
(highlighted) and the software versions of the installed
hardware are displayed. See Figure 5-83.

7. Select the Load File option button. See Figure 5-85.
Typical
Figure 5-85: Channel Plan Option Buttons

8. Select the Load File option button and observe the Figure 5-87: Chan Plan Page - Programming
Load Channel Plan window is displayed. See
Figure 5-86.
Figure 5-86: Load Channel Plan Window
12. Select the Main tab and observe the Main page is
displayed.
option button.
9. Navigate to the channel plan file required, select the 14. Observe the Disconnect Port-X option button
file, select the Open option button, and observe the changes to read Connect to Radio.
Load Channel Plan window is no longer displayed. 15. Close the STRATA TX System Configuration Utility
10. Select the Program Page option button. window.
11. Observe the Program Page option button changes to 16. Power down your STRATA TX system and disconnect
read Programming, then reads Verifying, and finally the RS-232 cable between the TX system and the RS-
reads Program Page when the programming is 232 connector on your PC.
complete. See Figure 5-87.

5.5 Saving the Configuration to a File Figure 5-89: Saving a Configuration to File
Regardless of how you created your new configuration (from a

file or from a TX System), it is always good practice to save the
configuration file to your PC for future use.
To save a configuration to a file, perform the following steps:
1. Have the desired configuration displayed on-screen.
2. Select the STRATA TX Configuration Utility Main page
tab.
3. Select the Save Settings to File option button. See
Figure 5-88.
Figure 5-88: Saving Configuration
6. Type the file name in the File Name box.

7. Select the Save button and observe the Save to a

STRATA TX Configuration File window is no longer
displayed.
4. Observe the Save to a STRATA TX Configuration
File window appears. See Figure 5-89.
5. Navigate to the directory where the file will be saved. 5.6 COFDM ASI Input Settings
This can be on your PC’s C: drive, or on any drive you
For each Preset with a Radio page Operation Mode of COFDM
choose. The default directory is “My Documents”.
ASI In, the external ASI input bit rate must be known in order to
accurately select the COFDM page Modulation, Bandwidth,
FEC, and Guard options.

Adjustment Parameters There are four COFDM ASI In Guard Interval This value represents a space or time interval
adjustment parameters that affect transmission characteristics. inserted between transmitted symbols. Longer Guard Intervals
These adjustments affect video bandwidth, the amount of (GI) allow additional time before data is sampled at the expense
Forward Error Correction (FEC) applied, and resilience against of reducing payload data throughput.
undesired microwave signal reflections (echoes). These
Adjusting the GI parameter allows destructive reflections to fall in
parameters are as follows:
the Guard Interval and therefore minimize Inter-Symbol
Bandwidth - 6 MHz, 7 MHz, and 8 MHz Interference (ISI). For example, a GI value of 1/4 is intended for
• Modulation format - QPSK, 16 QAM, and 64 QAM use when longer return echoes are encountered, i.e., echoes
delayed up to 56 microseconds from the primary wave.
• FEC (code rate) - 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, and 7/8
Setting Selections Table 5-2 on page 5-41, Table 5-3 on
• Guard Interval - 1/4, 1/8, 1/16, and 1/32. page 5-42, and Table 5-4 on page 5-42 are provided to aid in
Bandwidth This parameter is rarely changed. The 8 MHz selection of ASI throughput bit rates for pedestal Bandwidth
COFDM bandwidth is most often used for Digital Video options of 6 MHz, 7 MHz, and 8 MHz respectively.
Broadcasting - Terrestrial (DVB-T) applications. For lower To select the required Modulation, FEC, and Guard (interval)
quality video transmission applications where extra signal settings, the pedestal Bandwidth must first be selected. After
robustness is required, 6 MHz or 7 MHz COFDM bandwidth selecting the required 6 MHz, 7 MHz, or 8 MHz pedestal
transmissions may be deployed. Bandwidth option, refer to Table 5-2 on page 5-41, Table 5-3 on
Modulation Changes from QPSK to 16 QAM and from 16 QAM page 5-42, or Table 5-4 on page 5-42, as applicable to the
to 64 QAM result in dramatic increases in data throughput. This Bandwidth option selected.
is because higher modulation complexity multiplies the Bits/ The ASI input bit rate is applied externally to the TXU front panel
Hertz value, or the number of data bits represented by each SIGNAL INPUT connector or the TCU rear panel SIGNAL IN
symbol state. QPSK provides 2 Bits/Hertz, 16 QAM provides 4 connector. Note the ASI input bit rate and locate a
Bits/Hertz, and 64 QAM provides 6 Bits/Hertz. corresponding bit rate value in the applicable table. The bit rate
FEC Code Rate This fraction represents the amount of Reed- value in the table must not be less than the ASI input bit rate and
Solomon error correction applied to the 188 byte transport must not be greater than 10% above the ASI input bit rate.
packet. For example, an FEC code rate of 1/2 (50%) uses the Locating the bit rate value in the table then allows you to identify
largest amount of available data bandwidth for error correction, the corresponding Modulation option (QPSK, 16 QAM, or 64
as shown by the reduced data throughput of the payload data QAM), the FEC option (1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, or 7/8), and the Guard
stream. interval option (1/4, 1/8, 1/16, or 1/32).
Conversely, an FEC code rate of 7/8 (87.5%) uses a much For example, if the ASI input bit rate is 12.50 Mbits and you have
smaller portion of the available data bandwidth for error selected the Bandwidth 6 MHz option, locate values in Table 5-2
correction. This results in less robustness when the transmitted on page 5-41 that are not less than 12.50 and not greater than
signal undergoes stress. 12.50 + 10% (13.75) Mbits.

With an ASI input bit rate of 12.50 Mbits, Table 5-2 contains a
total of five values with bit rates of not less than 12.50 and not Table 5-2: 6 MHz Bandwidth ASI Throughput Bit Rates
greater than 13.75 Mbits with Modulation, FEC, and Guard
option combinations available as follows: 6 MHz Pedestal
• Modulation = 16 QAM, FEC = 3/4, and Guard = 1/16 (Bit Guard Interval
rate = 13.17) Modulation FEC
1/4 1/8 1/16 1/32
• Modulation = 16 QAM, FEC = 3/4, and Guard = 1/32 (Bit QPSK 1/2 3.74 4.15 4.39 4.52
rate = 13.58) 2/3 4.98 5.53 5.86 6.03
• Modulation = 16 QAM, FEC = 7/8, and Guard = 1/4 (Bit 3/4 5.60 6.22 6.59 6.79
rate = 13.07) 5/6 6.22 6.92 7.32 7.54
rate = 13.17) 16 QAM 1/2 7.46 8.30 8.78 9.05
rate = 13.58). 3/4 11.20 12.44 13.17 13.58
Rules for selection of the most robust bit rate throughput when 5/6 12.44 13.82 14.64 15.08
using the tables are as follows: 7/8 13.07 14.51 15.37 15.83
• Select the lowest Modulation complexity option available, 64 QAM 1/2 11.20 12.44 13.17 13.58
i.e., QPSK 2/3 14.93 16.59 17.57 18.10
• Select the highest (most robust) FEC rate available, i.e., 3/4 16.79 18.66 19.76 20.36
1/2 5/6 18.66 20.74 21.95 22.62
• Select the Guard interval option based on the most 7/8 1960 21.77 23.16 23.75
resistant data rate available, i.e., 1/4.
Note See ”COFDM Page” on page C-13 for additional

information on Modulation, Bandwidth, FEC, and
Guard options to make your option selections.
With an ASI input bit rate of 12.5 Mbits, the most robust choice of
Modulation, FEC, and Guard options would be Modulation =
16 QAM, FEC = 3/4, and FEC = 1/16.

Table 5-3: 7 MHz Bandwidth ASI Throughput Bit Rates Table 5-4: 8 MHz Bandwidth ASI Throughput Bit Rates
7 MHz Pedestal 8 MHz Pedestal

Guard Interval Guard Interval
Modulation FEC Modulation FEC
1/4 1/8 1/16 1/32 1/4 1/8 1/16 1/32
QPSK 1/2 4.36 4.84 5.12 5.28 QPSK 1/2 4.98 5.53 5.85 6.03
2/3 5.81 6.45 6.83 7.04 2/3 6.64 7.37 7.81 8.04
3/4 6.53 7.25 7.68 7.92 3/4 7.46 8.29 8.78 9.05
5/6 7.25 8.07 8.54 8.79 5/6 8.29 9.22 9.76 10.05
7/8 7.62 8.47 8.97 9.24 7/8 8.71 9.68 10.25 10.56
16 QAM 1/2 8.70 9.68 10.25 10.55 16 QAM 1/2 9.95 11.06 11.71 12.06
2/3 11.61 12.91 13.67 14.09 2/3 13.27 14.75 15.61 16.09
3/4 13.06 14.52 15.37 15.84 3/4 14.93 16.59 17.56 18.10
5/6 14.52 16.13 17.08 17.60 5/6 16.59 18.43 19.52 20.11
7/8 15.24 16.93 17.93 18.47 7/8 17.42 19.35 20.49 21.11
64 QAM 1/2 13.06 14.52 15.37 15.84 64 QAM 1/2 14.93 16.59 17.56 18.10
2/3 17.42 19.36 20.49 21.11 2/3 19.91 22.12 23.42 24.13
3/4 19.59 21.77 23.06 23.75 3/4 22.39 24.88 26.35 27.14
5/6 21.77 24.19 25.61 26.39 5/6 24.88 27365 29.27 30.16
7/8 22.86 25.40 26.90 27.71 7/8 26.13 29.03 30.74 31.67

6 Installation • Unpack the equipment carefully to avoid accidental
damage.
• Be sure to locate all parts and accessories.
6.1 Chapter Overview • Verify that the items shipped agree with those listed on
This chapter describes how to unpack and install your STRATA the packing list.
TX System. The topics covered in this chapter are listed below. • DO NOT discard the container or packing material until
you have inspected the equipment and are sure there is
no shipping damage. The container and packing must be
Topic Page available in the event that a damage claim needs to be
Unpacking 6-1 filed with the shipping carrier.
Initial Inspection 6-1
Damage in Shipment 6-1 6.3 Initial Inspection
Mounting and Cabling 6-2 After the equipment is unpacked, we recommend you inspect it
Power Connections 6-12 using the following checklist:
Grounding 6-17 • Check for any dents or scratches. If the equipment is
Audio Connections 6-18 dented or scratched, it may have suffered internal
Signal Connections 6-28 damage as well.
Data Connections 6-29 • Check that the equipment is clean and dry.
Powering Up 6-35 • Check that no cables or connectors are broken, damaged,
Product Modifications 6-35 or loose.
• Check that no switches or LED indicators are broken,
damaged, or loose.
6.2 Unpacking
6.4 Damage in Shipment
Each unit is shipped assembled, wired, and factory tested. Each
unit is packaged in appropriate shipping containers. Should any damage be discovered after unpacking the unit, use
the following procedure:
Here are some tips to help you with unpacking your new
equipment: • Immediately file a claim with the shipping carrier.
STRATA TX Technical Reference Manual Installation 6-1

• Forward a copy of the damage report to MRC Customer or MRC for the hardware needed to convert these units to use
Service. the Fixed Mounting Bracket.
• Contact MRC Customer Service to determine the
disposition of the equipment. Figure 6-1: Two-Unit TX System Fixed Mounting Bracket
6.5 Mounting and Cabling

Each installation or deployment will have its own specific tasks
according to the application and the installed hardware. The
following sections describe two options for mounting and cabling
the STRATA TX System:
• Floor/Bulkhead Installation
• Portable Deployment
6.5.1 Floor/Bulkhead Installation Cabling Wiring mounted in a moving aircraft or vehicle is

For mobile applications such as an aircraft or vehicle, the subject to extremes of temperature, humidity, and vibration.
STRATA TX System is usually bolted in place and the cabling is MRC recommends the following good general practices:
permanently installed. Power comes from aircraft (or vehicle) • Secure the cabling at close intervals along its entire
power. length.
Mounting The STRATA TX System is typically mounted on a • Protect the cabling with additional sheathing or padding
bulkhead or on the floor of a compartment using an MRC Fixed anywhere it passes through a hole or lays against an
Mounting Bracket. The Fixed Mounting Bracket accepts the obstruction.
TXU, TCU, and HPU and provides “ears” at the front to which the
TX System assemblies attach. Fixed Mounting Brackets are • Provide flex relief at any location where the cable must
available for two-unit (See Figure 6-1), i.e., TXU and TCU, or change direction sharply, to maintain a smooth bend and
three-unit systems, i.e., TCU, TXU, and HPU. prevent kinking.
The TXU, TCU, and HPU must have the correct mounting • Provide strain relief at each connector to absorb any
hardware installed with mating “ears” and screws to attach to the pulling forces on the cable and prevent damage to the
Fixed Mounting Bracket. If your STRATA TX System was connector.
originally equipped for use with a Universal Mounting Bracket, it
will not have this hardware. Consult your Sales Representative

When attaching an MRC Quick Release Mount or Dovetail
CAUTION Be sure the power being supplied matches Adapter Plate to a non-MRC tripod, the Quick Release Mount
the power required by the equipment. and Dovetail Adapter Plate both have standard tripod mounting
features and your tripod mount may not require modifications to
attach the Quick Release Mount or Dovetail Adapter Plate.
The method required to attach a Quick Release Mount or
CAUTION Power supply cords and cables must be
Dovetail Adapter Plate to a non-MRC tripod mount is your
protected. Do not run cords where they can
responsibility and you may have to modify your tripod mount to
be walked upon. Protect cables against
attach either the Quick Release Mount or the Dovetail Adapter
pinching and chafing. Pay special attention
Plate.
to locations where the cables enter or exit
an enclosure or make a sharp bend. The various options available to attach the MDR-2 to an MRC
tripod or to non-MRC tripods are described in the following
paragraphs.
CAUTION Ensure that the electrical supply is protected

6.5.3 Standalone TXU/TCU Mounting - MRC
by overcurrent protection devices as
required by the applicable electrical codes. Tripod
A standalone STRATA TXU or TCU will typically be attached to a
Quick Release Mount for easy mounting on an MRC tripod. The
6.5.2 Portable Deployment Quick Release Mount is attached to the bottom of the Universal
Mounting Bracket using four 1/2-inch long, #6-32, flat head
For portable deployment operations, the STRATA TX System will screws. See Figure 6-2 for the hardware stackup.
typically be moved from place to place and will be set up each
time. The power, antennas, and audio/video connections are Figure 6-2: Universal Mounting Bracket and Quick Release
usually removed at the end of each deployment. Mount - Hardware Stackup
To mount a STRATA TX System on an MRC tripod, MRC offers a Universal Flat Head
Quick Release Mount. For portable deployment Operations Mounting Screws
where you are mounting the STRATA TX System to another type Bracket
of tripod that doesn’t directly accept the MRC Quick Release
Note:
Mount, consult with MRC or your tripod manufacturer. Quick Release Not drawn to
MRC has Dovetail Adapter Plates that will convert some types of Mount scale.
tripods to accept the MRC Quick Release Mount system.

The Quick Release Mount will typically remain attached to the 6.5.4 STRATA TX System and ACU Mounting -
Universal Mounting Bracket. See Figure 6-3. MRC Tripod
The TXU/TCU is installed in the Universal Mounting Bracket and The STRATA TX System may include a TXU, TCU, or both a
is secured using the two Universal Mounting Bracket latches. TXU and TCU and the optional ACU. The TXU, TCU, and ACU
The Quick Release Mount, with the Universal Mounting Bracket each require individual Universal Mounting Brackets and a
and the TXU/TCU, is then attached to the Dovetail Adapter Plate Mounting Plate for installation on an MRC tripod.
machined in the MRC tripod mount.
A Universal Mounting Bracket is attached to the Mounting Plate
The TXU/TCU does not need to be removed from the Universal using four 3/8-inch long, #6-32, flat head screws. The Quick
Mounting Bracket at the end of each deployment. Release Mount is attached to the Universal Mounting Bracket
and Mounting Plate using four 1/2-inch long, #6-32, flat head
Figure 6-3: Standalone TXU/TCU Tripod Mount - MRC screws. Hardware stackup is as shown in Figure 6-4.
Tripod
Universal Figure 6-4: Universal Mounting Bracket, Mounting Plate,
Mounting and Quick Release Mount - Hardware Stackup
Bracket 3/8-Inch Long Flat Note:
Head Screws Not drawn to
scale.
Latches
(2 Each) Universal
Mounting Mounting
Quick Release Plate Bracket
Mount
Quick
Dovetail Adapter Release 1/2-Inch Long
Plate (Machined) Mount Flat Head Screws
MRC Tripod The Quick Release Mount will typically remain attached to the
Mount Mounting Plate and Universal Mounting Bracket.
The upper Universal Mounting Bracket is attached to the lower
Universal Mounting Bracket and is secured in position using the
two thumbwheel screws located on the lower Universal Mounting
Bracket. See Figure 6-5 on page 6-5.

Figure 6-5: TXU and/or TCU and ACU Tripod Mount - MRC When your STRATA TX System consists of a standalone TXU or
Tripod TCU, the TXU or TCU is installed in the upper Universal
Mounting Bracket and is secured using the two Universal
TXU/TCU Universal TXU Universal Mounting Bracket latches.
Mounting Bracket Mounting Bracket
(Standalone) or When your STRATA TX System consists of both a TXU and a
(TXU and TCU
TCU Universal TCU, each unit requires a separate Universal Mounting Bracket.
System)
Mounting Bracket The TCU is installed in the middle Universal Mounting Bracket
(TXU and TCU and the TXU is installed in the upper Universal Mounting
System) Bracket. Both units are secured using the Universal Mounting
Universal Bracket latches.
Mounting Bracket
Latches The Quick Release Mount, with the Universal Mounting
Thumbwheel Brackets, ACU, and TXU and/or TCU, is then attached to the
Screws Dovetail Adapter Plate machined in the MRC tripod mount. See
ACU Universal Figure 6-6 on page 6-6.
Mounting Mounting Bracket The ACU and TX System do not need to be removed from the
Plate Universal Mounting Brackets at the end of each deployment.
Quick Dovetail Note The versatility of the Quick Release Mount and a
Release Adapter Plate mating Dovetail Adapter Plate allows the Quick
Mount (Machined) Release Mount to be attached to the bottom of the
Universal Mounting Bracket and the Dovetail
MRC Adapter Plate to be attached to a non-MRC tripod,
Tripod or vice versa.
Mount
The method you use to attach the STRATA TX
System to a non-MRC tripod is your choice.
The ACU is installed in the lower Universal Mounting Bracket

and is secured using the two Universal Mounting Bracket
latches.

Figure 6-6: TX System and ACU MRC Tripod Mount - Quick Release Mount will typically remain attached to the
Typical Universal Mounting Bracket.
Universal Figure 6-7: Universal Mounting Bracket and Quick Release

Mounting TXU or Mount - Hardware Stackup
Brackets TCU Flat Head
Universal
Mounting Screws
Mounting ACU
Plate Bracket
Note:
Dovetail Quick Release Not drawn to
Quick Adapter Plate Mount scale.
Release (Machined)
Mount The Dovetail Adapter Plate is then attached to the non-MRC
tripod mount. See Figure 6-8 on page 6-7
The TXU/TCU is installed in the Universal Mounting Bracket and
Tripod is secured using the two Universal Mounting Bracket latches.
The Quick Release Mount, with the Universal Mounting Bracket
and the TXU/TCU, is then attached to the Dovetail Adapter Plate
attached to the non-MRC tripod mount.
The TXU/TCU does not need to be removed from the Universal
Mounting Bracket at the end of each deployment.
6.5.5 Standalone TXU/TCU Mounting - Non-MRC

Tripod (Option 1)
To mount a standalone TXU/TCU on a non-MRC tripod, one
option is to attach the Quick Release Mount to the bottom of the
Universal Mounting Bracket using four 1/2-inch long, #6-32, flat
head screws. Hardware stackup is as shown in Figure 6-7. The

Figure 6-8: TXU/TCU Tripod Mount - Non-MRC Tripod Release Mount is attached to the Universal Mounting Bracket
and Mounting Plate using four 1/2-inch long, #6-32, flat head
Universal
screws. Hardware stackup is as shown in Figure 6-9.
Mounting
Bracket
Figure 6-9: Universal Mounting Bracket, Mounting Plate,
and Quick Release Mount - Hardware Stackup
Latches 3/8-Inch Long Flat Note:
(2 Each) Head Screws Not drawn to
scale.
Quick Release Universal
Mount Mounting Mounting
Dovetail Adapter Plate Bracket
Plate
Quick
Release 1/2-Inch Long Flat
Non-MRC Mount Head Screws
Tripod Mount
The Dovetail Adapter Plate is then attached to the non-MRC
tripod mount.
two thumbwheel screws on the lower Universal Mounting
Bracket. See Figure 6-10 on page 6-8.
6.5.6 STRATA TX System and ACU Mounting - The ACU is installed in the lower Universal Mounting Bracket
Non-MRC Tripod (Option 2) and is secured using the two Universal Mounting Bracket
To mount a TX System and an optional ACU on a non-MRC latches. The STRATA TX System is installed in the upper
tripod, one option is to attach the Quick Release Mount to the Universal Mounting Bracket(s) and is secured using the
bottom of a Mounting Plate and to attach a Dovetail Adapter Universal Mounting Bracket latches.
Plate to the non-MRC tripod mount. The TXU and/or TCU and The Quick Release Mount, with the Universal Mounting
the optional ACU require individual Universal Mounting Brackets Brackets, ACU, and TX System, is then attached to the Dovetail
and the Mounting Plate for installation. Adapter Plate attached to the non-MRC tripod mount.
A Universal Mounting Bracket is attached to the Mounting Plate The TX System and ACU do not need to be removed from the
using four 3/8-inch long, #6-32, flat head screws. The Quick Universal Mounting Brackets at the end of each deployment.

Figure 6-10: TXU and/or TCU and ACU Tripod Mount - Non- 6.5.7 Standalone TXU/TCU Mounting - Non-MRC
MRC Tripod Tripod (Option 3)
TXU/TCU Universal TXU Universal To mount a standalone TXU or TCU on a non-MRC tripod,
Mounting Bracket Mounting Bracket another option is to attach the Dovetail Adapter Plate to the
(Standalone) or (TXU and TCU bottom of the Universal Mounting Bracket using four 1/2-inch
TCU Universal System) long, #6-32, flat head screws. Hardware stackup is as shown in
Mounting Bracket Figure 6-11. The Dovetail Adapter Plate will typically remain
(TXU and TCU attached to the Universal Mounting Bracket.
System)
Universal
Figure 6-11: Universal Mounting Bracket and Dovetail
Mounting Bracket
Adapter Plate - Hardware Stackup
Latches
Thumbwheel Universal Flat Head
Screws Mounting Screws
ACU Universal Bracket
Mounting Mounting Bracket Note:
Plate Dovetail Not drawn to
Adapter Plate scale.
Quick Dovetail
Release Adapter Plate The Quick Release Mount is then attached to the non-MRC
Mount tripod mount.
MRC is secured using the two Universal Mounting Bracket latches.
Tripod The Dovetail Adapter Plate, with the Universal Mounting Bracket
Mount and the TXU/TCU, is then attached to the Quick Release Mount
attached to the non-MRC tripod mount. See Figure 6-12 on
page 6-9.
The TX System does not need to be removed from the Universal
Mounting Bracket at the end of each deployment.

Figure 6-12: Quick Release Mount on Non-MRC Tripod Mounting Plate using four 3/8-inch long, #6-32, flat head screws.
The Dovetail Adapter Plate is attached to the Mounting Plate and
TXU/TCU Universal Mounting Bracket using four 1/2-inch long, #6-32, flat
Universal head screws. Hardware stackup is as shown in Figure 6-13.
Mounting
Bracket Figure 6-13: Universal Mounting Bracket, Mounting Plate,
and Quick Release Mount - Hardware Stackup
Universal 3/8-Inch Long Flat Note:
Dovetail Mounting Not drawn to
Head Screws
Adapter Bracket Latches scale.
Plate Mounting
Quick Plate Universal
Release Mounting
Mount Bracket
Non-MRC
Tripod Mount Dovetail
Adapter 1/2-Inch Long Flat
Plate Head Screws
The Quick Release Mount is then attached to the non-MRC

tripod mount. See Figure 6-14 on page 6-10.
Bracket.
6.5.8 STRATA TX System and ACU Mounting -
Non-MRC Tripod (Option 4)
To mount a STRATA TX System and an optional ACU on a non-
MRC tripod, another option is to attach the Dovetail Adapter
Plate to the bottom of a Mounting Plate and to attach the Quick
Release Mount to the non-MRC tripod.
The TXU, TCU, and the optional ACU each require individual
Universal Mounting Brackets and a Mounting Plate for
installation. A Universal Mounting Bracket is attached to the

Figure 6-14: Quick Release Mount on Non-MRC Tripod - TX 6.5.9 Standalone TXU/TCU Mounting - QuickSet
System and ACU Tripod Mount (Option 5)
Universal To mount a standalone TXU or TCU on a non-MRC tripod that
Mounting contains a QuickSet tripod mount, a QuickSet Quick Change
Brackets
Adapter is attached to the bottom of the Universal Mounting
Bracket using four 3/4-inch long, #6-32, flat head screws, flat
Thumbwheel washers, lock washers, and nuts. Hardware stackup is as
Screws shown in Figure 6-15.
Universal
Mounting Figure 6-15: QuickSet Quick Change Adapter - Hardware
Bracket Latches Stackup
Flat Head
ACU Universal Universal Screws Note:
Mounting Mounting Not drawn to
Mounting scale.
Bracket Bracket
Plate
Quick Change
Dovetail
Adapter
Adapter
Plate Quick Flat Flat
Release Washers Washers
Mount Lock Lock
Nuts Washers
Washers
Non-MRC
Tripod Mount The QuickSet Quick Change Adapter will typically remain
attached to the Universal Mounting Bracket.
is secured using the two Universal Mounting Bracket latches.
The QuickSet Quick Change Adapter, with the Universal
Mounting Bracket and the TXU/TCU, is then attached to the
QuickSet tripod mount and is secured with the tripod mount
locking clamp. See Figure 6-16 on page 6-11.

The TXU/TCU does not need to be removed from the Universal A Universal Mounting Bracket is attached to a Mounting Plate
Mounting Bracket at the end of each deployment. using four 3/8-inch flat head screws. The Universal Mounting
Bracket and Mounting Plate are then attached to a QuickSet
Figure 6-16: Quick Change Adapter On Quickset Tripod Quick Change Adapter using four 3/4-inch long, #6-32, flat head
Mount screws, flat washers, lock washers, and nuts. Hardware stackup
is as shown in Figure 6-17.
TXU/TCU
Universal
Figure 6-17: QuickSet Quick Change Adapter - Hardware
Mounting
Stackup
Bracket
3/8-Inch Long Flat 3/4-Inch Long 3/8-Inch Long Flat
Universal Head Screws Flat Head Head Screws
Quick
Mounting Universal Screws
Change
Adapter Bracket Latches Mounting Note:
Bracket Not drawn to
Tripod Mount
scale.
Locking
Clamp Quick Change
Adapter Mounting
Plate
QuickSet
Tripod Mount Flat Flat
Washers Washers
Lock Lock
Nuts Washers
Washers
The QuickSet Quick Change Adapter will typically remain

attached to the Universal Mounting Bracket.
6.5.10 STRATA TX System and ACU Mounting - The Quick Release Mount is then attached to the non-MRC
tripod mount.
Non-MRC Tripod (Option 6)
To mount a STRATA TX System and an optional ACU on a non-
MRC tripod that contains a QuickSet tripod mount, the TX
System and the optional ACU each require individual Universal
Bracket.
Mounting Brackets and a Mounting Plate for installation.

The ACU is installed in the lower Universal Mounting Bracket 6.6 Power Connections
and is secured using the two Universal Mounting Bracket
latches. The TX System is installed in the upper Universal
Mounting Bracket(s) and is secured using the Universal
6.6.1 Power Requirements
Mounting Bracket latches. See Figure 6-18. The STRATA TXU and TCU have the following power
requirements.
The Dovetail Adapter Plate, with the Universal Mounting
Brackets, ACU, and TX System, is then attached to the Quick Supply Voltage: +10.5 to +48 Volts DC
Release Mount attached to the non-MRC tripod mount.
Power Consumption: 24 watts nominal
Figure 6-18: Quick Change Adapter on QuickSet Tripod Certain other voltages can be accommodated by special
Mount - ACU and MDR-2 request; contact your Sales Representative for the latest details.
Universal
Mounting 6.6.2 Power Supply and Distribution
Brackets DC power is supplied externally, from the optional STRATA ACU
power supply or from another DC power source, such as aircraft
Thumbwheel or vehicle power.
Screws
Power is distributed to the TX System in one of two ways:
Universal through the front panel PWR/RS-485 connector on the TXU and
Mounting the rear panel POWER connector on the TCU or DC power is
Bracket Latches superimposed on the coaxial cable connecting the TXU and
Mounting TCU.
Plate ACU Universal Which method is used will depend on whether the TXU and TCU
Mounting are located together (co-located) or are mounted in separate
Bracket locations.
QuickSet
If your STRATA TX System contains an HPU, DC power is
Quick
QuickSet provided to the HPU superimposed on the coax cable between
Change
Tripod the TXU and the HPU.
Adapter
Mount
Tripod
Mount
Note A TCU and TXU are defined as being “co-located”
when the TXU and TCU are physically separated
Locking
by not greater than 6 feet.
Clamp

TXU and TCU Co-Located If the TXU and TCU are co-located, Figure 6-20: Powering the TXU from the TCU
DC power must be supplied to each unit through their individual
Coax
power connectors from the same power source. See Figure 6- STRATA STRATA
19. A DC to DC Branched Wire Harness Assembly is available TXU TCU
for use with a STRATA ACU. Do not use DC on coax to power
Coax Up to 600 ft.
the TXU or TCU when the units are co-located. Power
(180 m)
Cable
Figure 6-19: Powering Co-Located TXU and TCU
STRATA DC Power (+28 V to +48 V)
HPU
STRATA STRATA STRATA
HPU Coax TXU TCU
Branched Wire Figure 6-21: Powering the TCU from the TXU
Harness Assembly
Coax
DC Power (+10.5 V to +48 V) STRATA STRATA
TXU TCU
Up to 600 ft.
Power (180 m)
TXU and TCU Separated If the installation calls for separating Cable
the TXU and TCU, the TXU then receives DC power from the
TCU or the TCU receives DC power from the TXU superimposed STRATA DC Power (+28 V to
on the coaxial cable between the units. See Figure 6-20 and HPU +48 V)
Figure 6-21.
DC power superimposed on the coaxial cable between a TCU
and a TXU can be supplied from either the TCU or TXU,
depending upon the location of the DC power supply. CAUTION Turn off DC power on the coax before
Coaxial cable length/voltage limitations exist when powering connecting any test equipment.
from either the TXU or TCU. These limitations are based on
cable size, DC voltage input, cable resistance, and cable length.
Panel Power Connections The TXU and TCU use the same
A maximum length of 600 feet (180 meters) between the TXU
type of power connector. In the TXU, the PWR/RS-485
and TCU is supported. Contact MRC Technical Support for more
connector is located on the front panel; in the TCU the POWER
information on cable requirements.
connector is located on the rear panel.

The mating connector that plugs into this panel connector is Figure 6-23: Mating Power Cable Connector
described below. B
Manufacturer: ITT Cannon A
H
Part Number KPT06F12-8S
G C
Description: 8-pin female, cable-mount. F D

E
See Figure 6-22 for pin designations on the panel connector. The Front View
mating connector is shown in Figure 6-23.
A
See Table 6-1 for connections. B
B A H
Figure 6-22: Panel Power Connector - Front View C G
D F
E
Rear View
Table 6-1: Power Connections
Pin Function Comment

A DC Power (+) Use 18 ga. stranded wire for
B lengths up to 10’ (3 m). Use 1
wire for each pin (3 wires total).
C Consult factory if you need
longer cabling.
D DC Return (-) Use 18 ga. stranded wire for
E lengths up to 10’ (3 m). Use 1
wire for each pin (2 wires total).
Consult factory if you need
longer cabling.

Table 6-1: Power Connections (Continued)
Pin Function Comment

F Not Used
G
H
6.6.3 Power Cable Assemblies

Power cable assemblies are available from MRC to power single
(TXU or TCU) or multiple STRATA TX System units (TXU and
TCU).
DC to DC Wire Harness Assembly A prefabricated DC to DC
Wire Harness Assembly (See Figure 6-24 on page 6-16) is
available from MRC to connect the ACU DC OUTPUT connector
to either the TXU PWR/RS-485 connector or the TCU POWER
connector.
This wire harness assembly is available in two lengths (3 ft. / 1 m
or 10 ft. / 3 m) and comes complete with 8-pin connectors wired
on each end. One cable is provided with each STRATA ACU
ordered. If your STRATA TX System consists of a co-located
TCU and TXU, a DC to DC Branched Wire Harness Assembly is
available.
DC to DC Branched Wire Harness Assembly Both the TXU
and TCU should be powered from the same DC power source
when the TXU and TCU are co-located. A prefabricated DC to
DC Branched Wire Harness Assembly (See Figure 6-25 on
page 6-16) is available from MRC to connect the ACU DC
OUTPUT connector to the TXU PWR/RS-485 connector and the
TCU POWER connector for this application.
The DC to DC Branched Wire Harness Assembly must be
ordered with the STRATA ACU for co-located TXU and TCU
operations.

Figure 6-24: DC to DC Wire Harness Assembly
Figure 6-25: DC to DC Branched Wire Harness Assembly
RED A A +V
RED B B +V
RED C C +V
BLK D D GND
BLK E E GND
F F
G G
H H
A +V
B +V
C +V
D GND
E GND
WIRING DIAGRAM F
G
H

6.6.4 Additional Powering Notes 6.7 Grounding
Check the electrical supply to be sure it can provide all the power The mounting bracket and equipment must be connected to the
needed at the site without overloading. Power ratings for common ground on the installation. This common ground is often
equipment can be found on a rating plate, usually on the rear the vehicle or aircraft ground. The ground wire should be as
panel. If necessary, consult a licensed electrician. short as possible, and follow the straightest path possible.
CAUTION Be sure the power being supplied matches CAUTION Be sure the equipment grounding follows
the power required by the equipment. applicable electrical codes.
CAUTION Power supply cords and cables must be CAUTION Never modify a grounded power plug to
protected. Do not run cords where they can connect to an ungrounded receptacle.
be walked upon. Protect cables against
pinching and chafing. Pay special attention
to locations where the cables enter or exit
an enclosure or make a sharp bend.
CAUTION Ensure that the electrical supply is protected

by overcurrent protection devices as
required by the applicable electrical codes.

6.8 Audio Connections Figure 6-26: Audio Panel Connector
The STRATA TX System can accept analog audio inputs or

digital audio inputs, depending on how the TX System is
configured. All audio inputs are applied to the TXU or TCU
AUDIO connector.
An AUDIO connector is present on the TXU if the TXU was
ordered to operate without a TCU. If the TXU was ordered to
operate with a TCU, the front panel TXU AUDIO connector is
replaced with a blank panel.
An AUDIO connector is present on the rear panel of the TCU if
the TCU is operated with or without a TXU.
6.8.2 Audio Input
6.8.1 Panel Connections The STRATA TX System provides options for separate audio
The TXU and TCU both use the same type of AUDIO connector. and video inputs, as well as analog composite and embedded
In the TXU, the connector is mounted on the front panel; on the digital formats. Audio inputs and outputs are factory configured
TCU it is mounted on the rear panel. for each customer’s requirements.
The mating connector that plugs into this panel connector is • Software is specifically set up for each customer’s needs
described below. and hardware configurations.
Manufacturer: Amphenol (or ITT Cannon) Each STRATA TXU and TCU is shipped with pre-installed
factory Presets, as specified and ordered by the
Part Number MS3116F12-10S (KPT06F12-10S) customer.
Description: 10-pin female, cable-mount. Changes to Presets may be made using the STRATA TX
Configurator software (See the “Configurator Reference”
See Figure 6-26 for pin designations on the panel connector. Appendix on page C-1). Changes to Presets are limited
by the hardware options installed in the unit(s).
• Hardware - Internal cabling connections from the TXU or
TCU AUDIO connector to the FMT and/or MPEG/COFDM
modules are factory configured for each hardware
configuration ordered.

The TX System provides a maximum of four audio circuits. Each described in Table 6-3 on page 6-21.
audio circuit is a 3-wire balanced circuit capable of carrying one
Digital Mode In digital mode, the TX System receives a digital
tone or voice signal. An audio circuit can carry one analog
signal and routes the data to the COFDM modulator and then to
balanced channel or two digital AES/EBU channels.
the MPEG encoder. The TX System audio switching circuitry
• Analog - Four monaural or two stereo channels carried on connects the output of the MPEG encoder to the AUDIO
four XLR connectors. connector.
• Digital AES/EBU - Two digital channels carried on each When configured for analog audio output, the MPEG encoder
XLR connector. provides either two stereo or four monaural channels. All four
circuits are balanced outputs (Live, Return, Ground).
6.8.3 Audio Configurations In digital mode, the audio channels are referred to as Audio A
The STRATA TX System provides a maximum of four audio and Audio B.
circuits. Audio configurations available for the TCU or TXU are The connections used for digital mode audio input are described
shown in Table 6-2 on page 6-20. in Table 6-3 on page 6-21.
The TX System will provide analog audio in the following Audio XLR Cable Assembly A prefabricated cable assembly
circumstances: (See Figure 6-27 on page 6-22) is available that splits the audio
• When the TX System is operating in analog mode. connections from the front panel into four separate cables with
XLR connectors. The four cables are labelled Audio 1, 2, 3, and
• When the TX System is operating in digital mode, and the
4. One cable is included with each TX System ordered.
MPEG encoder is configured to provide analog audio
output. Should you need additional cables, contact MRC Customer
Service.
Analog Mode In analog mode, the TX System routes the Connections in this cable are shown in Table 6-3 on page 6-21.
analog signal through its analog FM modulator. The TX System
audio switching circuitry connects the output of the FM 6.8.4 FMT Audio Input
modulator to the AUDIO connector. Analog audio can be input to the system in the following ways:
The analog modulator provides either two stereo or four • Analog audio as part of a composite video input to the
monaural channels. All four circuits are balanced outputs (Live, transmitter.
Return, Ground).
• Four separate analog channels connected to the AUDIO
In analog mode, the STRATA TX Configuration Utility and the TX connector.
System Monitor Screens refer to these four analog circuits as
Audio #1, #2, #3, and #4. In a TCU with both FMT and MPEG modules installed, four
analog audio channels are connected in series to the FMT and
The connections used for analog mode audio output are the COFDM modules.

.
Table 6-2: TXU and TCU Audio Configurations
Audio
Connections Comments
Configuration
TXU - FMT Only
4 Analog Four circuits connected from the AUDIO connector to the FMT module
TXU - MPEG Only
4 Analog Four circuits connected from the AUDIO connector to the MPEG module (analog connectors)
4 Digital Four circuits connected from the AUDIO connector to the MPEG module (digital connector)
2 Analog Two analog circuits connected from the AUDIO connector to the MPEG module (analog connector)
2 Digital Two digital circuits connected from the AUDIO connector to the MPEG module (digital connector)
TCU - FMT Module Only
4 Analog Four circuits connected from the AUDIO connector to the FMT module
TCU - MPEG Module Only
4 Analog Four circuits connected from the AUDIO connector to the MPEG module (analog connectors)
4 Digital Four circuits connected from the AUDIO connector to the MPEG module (digital connector)
2 Analog Two analog circuits connected from the AUDIO connector to the MPEG module (analog connector)
2 Digital Two digital circuits connected from the AUDIO connector to the MPEG module (digital connector)
TCU - FMT and MPEG Module
4 Analog Four circuits connected from the AUDIO connector to the FMT module (analog connector) Might be used in
combination with
SDI embedded
audio.
2 Analog Two audio circuits connected from the AUDIO connector to the FMT module (analog connector)
2 Digital Two audio circuits connected from the AUDIO connector to the MPEG module (digital connector)
4 Digital Four circuits connected from the AUDIO connector to the MPEG module (digital connector) Might be used in
combination with
SDI embedded
audio.

Table 6-3: Audio Connections - Audio Output
Panel Audio Cable

Connector Function Analog Mode Digital Mode
Pin XLR Connector Pin Number
Audio A
A Right Channel 1 Controlled by Audio 3
(Return) Channel 1 in STRATA TX
B GND (See Note) Configuration Utility, Audio 1 1
displayed as Audio 1 on
C Right Channel 1 Monitor Screens. Controlled by Audio A in 2
(Live) STRATA TX Configuration
D Left Channel 1 Controlled by Audio Utility, displayed as Audio 3
(Return) Channel 2 in STRATA TX A on Monitor Screens.
B GND (See Note) Configuration Utility, Audio 2 1
E Left Channel 1 Monitor Screens. 2
(Return) (live)
Audio B
F Right Channel 2 Controlled by Audio 3
(Return) Channel 3 in STRATA TX
G GND (See Note) Configuration Utility, Audio 3 1
H Right Channel 2 Monitor Screens. Controlled by Audio B in 2
(Live) STRATA TX Configuration
J Left Channel 2 Controlled by Audio Utility, displayed as Audio 3
(Return) Channel 4 in STRATA TX B on Monitor Screens.
G GND (See Note) Configuration Utility, Audio 4 1
K Left Channel 2 Monitor Screens. 2
(Live)
Note: Channels 1 and 2 use the same GND connection B. Channels 3 and 4 use the same GND connection G.

Figure 6-27: Audio XLR Cable Assembly
38.00"
[96.52 cm]
22.00"
[55.88 cm]
Face
View

6.8.5 MPEG Audio Input not send a Packet ID code (PID) for Audio A. In the TX System,
the MPEG encoder detects the lack of a PID for Audio A and
MPEG audio circuits must be configured in pairs:
automatically duplicates the Audio B information onto Audio A.
• Audio A - Channels 1 and 2
Audio Cable Assembly A prefabricated cable assembly is
• Audio B - Channels 3 and 4 available that splits the audio connections from the front panel
Audio channels are configured using the STRATA TX connector into four separate cables with XLR connectors. One
Configuration Utility software. cable is included with each TX System ordered.
Should you need additional cables, contact MRC Customer
6.8.6 AES/EBU Audio Input Service.
The TX System will only provide digital audio when operating in The connections in this cable are shown in Table 6-6 on page 6-
digital mode. 27.
In digital mode, the TX System receives a digital signal and
routes the data to the MPEG encoder and then to the COFDM 6.8.7 TXU Audio and Video Connections
modulator. The TX System audio switching circuitry connects the The TXU provides several audio and video input and output
output of the MPEG encoder to the AUDIO connector. options.
When configured for digital audio output (AES/EBU), the MPEG The TXU can contain either FMT or MPEG/COFDM modules,
encoder provides two paired channels of digital data (+ and -), or but not both FMT and MPEG/COFDM modules. The TXU block
four individual channels. All four circuits are balanced outputs, diagram shown in Figure 6-28 on page 6-24 illustrates the
with each pair (+ and -) sharing one ground. multiple selectable inputs available.
In digital mode, the audio channels are referred to as Audio A
and Audio B. Note If the TXU is being used in combination with a
Audio A In digital audio output, Audio A continues to provide TCU, then all audio connections are made to the
analog audio with all the same pinouts and functions as in TCU. In this case, the TXU AUDIO connector is
analog audio output. replaced with a DC ON COAX switch (See ”TXU
and TCU Configurations” on page 2-9).
Audio B In digital audio output, all the digital data appears in
Audio B. Audio Connections All audio connections are made to the
The connections used for digital audio output are described in TXU through the front panel AUDIO connector, if present.
Table 6-6 on page 6-27.
Note - One Channel Disabled If you are using digital mode
and you turn off Audio A at the transmitter, the transmitter does

Figure 6-28: TXU Block Diagram
Table 6-4: TXU Input and Output Signal Options
SDI
MPEG
MPEG Signal
Module Signal Input Notes
MPEG ASI
Output
SDI/ASI CV COFDM
MPEG/ NTSC/PAL COFDM - RF Up-converted
COFDM COFDM (525/625) Channeled RF
ASI Input 70 MHZ
RF OUT SDI (525/625) COFDM - RF signal
SIGNAL IN IF
NTSC 70 MHz ASI COFDM - RF
PAL CV
SDI
ASI
IF RF
Up Converter + Amplifier
IF Filter FMT CV 70 MHZ
FMT NTSC/PAL CV - RF NTSC/PAL CV
FMT (525/625) Channelized RF
Inter-Unit
Communcitaion
Link
IF RF
6.8.8 TCU Audio and Video Connections

Video Connections Video connections are made to a single
BNC INPUT connector located on the front panel of the TXU. The TCU also provides several audio and video input and output
Video input selections are made by selecting Presets created options.
using the STRATA TX Configuration Utility software. The TCU can contain either FMT or MPEG/COFDM modules or
Video input options for the TXU are shown in Table 6-4. Input both FMT and MPEG/COFDM modules. The TCU block diagram
and output options depend on the optional FMT or MPEG/ shown in Figure 6-29 on page 6-25 illustrates the multiple
COFDM modules installed in the TXU. selectable inputs available.

Figure 6-29: TCU Block Diagram
SDI/ASI
Table 6-5: TCU Input and Output Signal Options
ASI
MPEG
MPEG System Signal Signal Monitor Alternate
MPEG Option Input Output Output Output
CV
MPEG/ NTSC/PAL ASI
COFDM MONITOR COFDM (525/625)
70 MHZ Only* SDI ASI
(525/625)
SIGNAL SIGNAL
IN NTSC/PAL COFDM - IF COFDM
OUT
NTSC (525/625)
PAL
SDI Filter SDI COFDM - IF COFDM
ASI (525/625)
IF
FMT CV 70 MHZ ASI COFDM - IF COFDM
FMT IF IF IF IF Bypass
Mode
FMT NTSC/PAL IF IF NTSC/PAL
Only (525/625) Composite Composite Composite
Video Video Video IF
Audio Connections All audio connections are made to the IF IF IF IF Bypass
TCU through the rear panel 10-pin AUDIO connector. Mode
Video Connections Video connections are made to a single
BNC SIGNAL IN connector located on the rear panel of the
TCU. Video input selections are made by selecting Presets
created using the STRATA TX Configuration Utility software.
Video input options for the TCU are shown in Table 6-5. Input
and output options depend on the optional FMT or MPEG/
COFDM modules installed in the TCU.

Table 6-5: TCU Input and Output Signal Options (Continued)
System Signal Signal Monitor Alternate

Option Input Output Output Output
MPEG/ NTSC/PAL ASI IF Bypass
COFDM Mode
and SDI ASI
FMT* (525/625)
NTSC/PAL COFDM - IF COFDM
(525/625)
NTSC/PAL IF IF NTSC/PAL
(525/625) Composite Composite
Video Video
SDI (525/ COFDM - IF COFDM
625)
ASI COFDM - IF ASI or

COFDM
IF IF IF IF Bypass
Mode
*ASI output possible when TCU is used in stand-alone (MPEG only)
mode.

Table 6-6: Audio Connections - Digital Audio Output
Panel Audio Cable

Connector Function Comments
Pin XLR Connector Pin Number
Audio A
A Right (return) Continues to provide 3
B Ground analog Audio A as in Audio 1 1
analog audio output. Controlled by Audio A in
C Right (live) STRATA TX Configuration 2
D Left (return) Utility, displayed as Audio 3
A on Monitor Screens.
B Ground Audio 2 1
E Left (live) 2
Audio B
F Channel 2 + Contains digital Audio B. 3
G Ground Audio 3 1
Controlled by Audio B in
H Channel 2 - STRATA TX Configuration 2
J Channel 1 + Contains digital Audio A. Utility, displayed as Audio 3
B on Monitor Screens.
G Ground Audio 4 1
K Channel 1 - 2

6.9 Signal Connections Table 6-7: Signal Connections (Continued)
Details of signal connections on the TXU, TCU, and HPU are STRATA
Function Connector Notes
provided in Table 6-7. Unit
TCU SIGNAL 75 Ohm Output may be 70 MHz
OUT TNC IF, analog video, digital
Table 6-7: Signal Connections
Connector ASI, or digital SDI
depending upon installed
STRATA
Function Connector Notes hardware and operating
Unit mode chosen. 70 MHz IF
TXU SIGNAL 75 Ohm Input may be 70 MHz IF, is at 0 dBm.Output may
INPUT BNC analog video, digital ASI, also include DC on coax.
Connector or digital SDI depending Monitor 75 Ohm Output can be configured
upon installed hardware (MON.) BNC to be either ASI or 70
and operating mode Connector MHz IF depending on
selected. 70 MHz IF is at installed hardware and
0 dBm. Input may also operating mode chosen.
include DC on coax.
SIGNAL 75 Ohm Input may be 70 MHz IF,
RF Output 50 Ohm RF output will be IN BNC analog video, digital ASI,
Connector Type N approximately 2 to 2.7 Connector or digital SDI depending
GHz. Output may also upon installed hardware
include DC on coax. and operating mode
chosen. 70 MHz IF is at 0
dBm. Input may also
include DC on coax
HPU RF IN 50 Ohm RF input will be
Connector Type N approximately 2 to 2.7
GHz. Input will include
DC on coax when TX
System is in transmit
mode.
RF Output 50 Ohm RF output will be
Connector Type N approximately 2 to 2.7
GHz. Output power is 12
watts maximum.

6.10 Data Connections 6.10.2 TXU and TCU Programming
The RS-232 data connections are used when programming the
Both the TXU and TCU have RS-232 data connections. On the
STRATA TX System using the STRATA TX Configuration Utility
TXU the RS-232 connector is on the rear panel; on the TCU it is
software running on a Windows PC.
on the front panel.
When a TXU and a TCU are connected, you need to connect to
These female DB-9 connectors are used for three purposes:
only one of their RS-232 connectors. The TXU and TCU will
• Remote Control using the STRATA Remote Control communicate over the coaxial connection between them, and
Panel. the STRATA TX Configuration Utility commands will be
• Radio Programming using a PC. automatically routed to the correct unit.
• Wayside Data communication. The TX System is configured to be a DTE device. If you need to
access the radio programming connections, a null modem cable
The TX System can be connected directly to a PC, or it can be is used to connect the TX System to your PC. One cable is
interfaced to a LAN for applications such as remote monitoring supplied with each TXU and TCU ordered. Additional cables can
and control. be purchased from MRC or from any computer or electronics
store.
6.10.1 Remote Control Panel
Programming connections are shown in Table 6-8 on page 6-31
The TX System can be controlled from a remote location using a and Figure 6-36 on page 6-33.
STRATA Remote Control Panel. This panel is typically used for
installation in an aircraft or a vehicle, where it is mounted in a 6.10.3 Wayside Data
cockpit instrument panel or rack and the TX System is in another
compartment. Overview The Wayside channel is a simplex data channel
transmitting data from the STRATA TX System to a receiver
The TX System connects to the Remote Control Panel using a system. See Figure 6-30 on page 6-30. Data is input to the TXU
standard null modem cable. One cable is supplied with each or TCU using connections to the serial port through a
Remote Control Panel ordered. Additional cables can be Multipurpose Data Cable provided by MRC.
purchased from MRC or from any computer or electronics store.
Compatibility MRC has verified that the Wayside channel is
For details on installing the Remote Control Panel and compatible with the following receivers:
connecting it to the TX System, refer to the STRATA Aircraft
Remote Control Panel Operator’s Guide (MRC part no. 400490) • Tandberg Alteia IRD (Integrated Receiver Decoder)
or the STRATA Remote Control Panel Operator’s Guide (MRC • STRATA Receiver Unit (RXU) with MPEG decoding
part no. 400489).
• STRATA Receiver Control Unit (RCU) with MPEG
decoding.

Figure 6-30: Wayside Simplex Data Channel The cable connects to the RS-232 connector on the TXU or TCU
and has connections for both the Wayside channel and the PC or
TX RX laptop required for use with the STRATA TX Configuration Utility.
Wayside Data connections are shown in Table 6-8 on page 6-31
and in Figure 6-36 on page 6-33.
WAYSIDE WAYSIDE Wayside Transmitter and Receiver Connections Data
connections on the transmit end of the Wayside channel for the
RS-232 serial port connector on the TXU or TCU are shown in
Data connections on the Receive end of the Wayside channel for
the RS-232 serial port connector on the TXU or TCU are shown
in Figure 6-36 on page 6-33. Both serial and Wayside
Wayside Connections to the Serial Port Connecting the connections are shown.
Wayside channel to the serial port requires use of a Serial/
Wayside Multipurpose Data Cable as shown in Figure 6-31 and 6.10.4 Panel Data Connectors
Figure 6-37 on page 6-34. The pinout of the panel DB-9 connectors is shown in Figure 6-32
and Table 6-8 on page 6-31, and illustrated in Figure 6-36 on
Figure 6-31: Wayside and Serial Interface Connections page 6-33.
Figure 6-32: RS-232 Panel Connector

RS-232 TX or RX
Serial
Connection to DB-9 Male -
PC or Laptop
Face View
Multipurpose
Data Cable
RS-232 Wayside
Data Channel
Signal
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9

PC or laptop PC. When connected to a DTE device, a null
Table 6-8: RS-232 Panel Connector modem cable must be connected between the DTE device and
the Multipurpose Data Cable DB-9 HOST male connector. If
Pin Function Comments connected to a Data Communications Equipment (DCE) device,
a null modem cable cannot be used, but a straight pin-to-pin
1 N/C
extension cable will be required.
2 Receive Data Used for communication between
TX System and external The WAYSIDE DB-9 female connector is configured as a DCE
3 Transmit Data
computer. device connector for connection to a modem, GPS, etc. When
4 N/C connected to a DCE device, a null modem cable must be
connected between the DCE device and the Multipurpose Data
5 GND
Cable DB-9 female WAYSIDE connector. If connected to a DTE
6 N/C device, a null modem cable cannot be used, but a straight pin-to-
7 Transmit Data Not used. pin extension cable will be required.
8 Receive Data Used for carrying Wayside Data Null modem cables may be obtained from MRC or any computer
from an external device. or electronics store.
9 N/C
6.10.6 Networking
6.10.5 Multipurpose Data Cable The RS-232 connector on the STRATA TX System can also be
In order to access both radio and Wayside data, you need to use connected to a network if desired. This allows both monitoring
the Multipurpose Data Cable shipped with your TX System. A and programming the STRATA TX System from a remote
wiring diagram for the Multipurpose Data Cable is shown in location.
Figure 6-36 on page 6-33. The cable is shown in Figure 6-37 on To connect the TX System to a network, you will need the items
page 6-34. If necessary, the Multipurpose Data Cable may be described below. Refer to Figure 6-33 on page 6-32.
ordered from MRC.
The Multipurpose Data Cable contains two DB-9 female
connectors and one DB-9 male connector. The Multipurpose
Data Cable contains band markers indicating connections to
HOST, WAYSIDE, and RS-232 connectors. The Multipurpose
Data Cable DB-9 female RS-232 connector is connected to
either the TXU or TCU RS-232 connector.
The HOST DB-9 male connector is configured as a Data
Terminal Equipment (DTE) device connector for connection to a

Figure 6-33: Network Interconnection Figure 6-34: Lantronix UDS-10 Device Server
Ethernet LAN
Interface
Cable
STRATA TX UDS-10 Device

System Server (or
Equivalent)
Figure 6-35: Network Interface Cable

• Device Server
There are several types on the market. Also called Serial-
to-Ethernet converters, they take serial RS-232 data and
convert it to the format needed for an Ethernet network.
One type MRC has used with success is the Lantronix

UDS-10. It accepts data via a DB-25 connector, and
connects to the network via an RJ-45 connector. See
Figure 6-34.
• Interface Cable
This cable is needed to connect to the STRATA TX
System data connector (DB-9) on one end and connect to
the device server on the other (a DB-25 connector in the
case of the UDS-10).
This is a custom cable which you will have to fabricate.

See Figure 6-35 for the connections on the STRATA end.

Figure 6-36: Multipurpose Radio and Wayside Data Cable
DB-9
(MALE)
DB-9
2
(FEMALE)
RECEIVE DATA
2 3 TO HOST DATA
TRANSMIT DATA PORT DTE
DEVICE (PC,
3 5 LAPTOP, ETC.)
SIGNAL GROUND
TO TXU/TCU 5
RS-232
CONNECTOR
7 2
(NOT USED) FROM WAYSIDE
8 3 DATA CHANNEL
TRANSMIT DATA DCE DEVICE
(MODEM, GPS,
5 ETC.)
SIGNAL GROUND
DB-9
(MALE)

Figure 6-37: Multipurpose Radio and Wayside Data Cable
5 9
RADIO (M)
1 6
5
RADIO/ 9
WAYSIDE (F)
6 1
1 6
WAYSIDE (F)
1 9
5
2
3
4
5 RADIO (M)
1 6
RED
2 7
WHT
3 8
4 9
RADIO/WAYSIDE BLK
5
(F) 6 1
WHT 2
7
RED 3
8
9 4
5 WAYSIDE (F)
6
7
8
9

6.11 Powering Up - The power up sequence is normal. See Section 3.3.3
on page 3-14.
When the wiring and mounting are completed, it is time to power 3. If everything appears to be normal, test the
up the STRATA TX System. As good practice, you should make performance of your TX System by setting up a link
a final check before power is applied. and transmitting and receiving video and audio.
6.11.1 Checks before power-up If you have any problems, refer to the “Troubleshooting” Chapter
Here are your final pre-power-up checks: on page 4-1 to determine the cause.
• Double check to be sure all the cables are connected to

the correct connectors. 6.12 Product Modifications
• Make sure the connections are all fully mated and locked. The product you purchased has been carefully designed and
tested, and is warranted to meet specifications when connected
and operated as described in this manual.
CAUTION Be sure the power being supplied matches
the power required by the equipment.
Note If you modify a product without authorization from
MRC, you will void the warranty.
6.11.2 Initial power-up
Now you are ready to apply power: For a complete Warranty statement, refer to the “Notices“ section
at the front of this manual.
1. Turn on the power.
Remember to turn on the PWR switches on both the

TXU and TCU.
If you are using DC Power on Coax to power the TXU

or TCU, be sure the DC On Coax switches (if present)
on both the TXU and TCU are set to ON. Also check
the Monitor Screens to be sure the TX System is
configured for 75 Ohm Coax Power to be On.
2. Check to see that:

- The front panel displays are working.
- The front panel LEDs illuminate.


7 Repair Business Hours: Monday - Friday
8:00 AM - 7:00PM Eastern Time (US)
(0800 - 1900 hrs US ET)
Telephone: 800-490-5700 (Press 4)
This chapter covers repairs to the STRATA TX System, including
which repairs can be done safely in the field and which should 978-671-5700 (Press 4)
only be performed at the MRC factory or an authorized repair Fax: 978-671-5800
depot.
E-mail: [email protected]
After regular business hours and on weekends and holidays, you
7.2 Supported Repairs can also reach our expert staff as follows:
The STRATA TX System, including the TXU, TCU, HPU, and Telephone: 978-671-5929
optional ACU, is designed to be compact, rugged and reliable.
The TXU, TCU, and HPU require specialized test equipment to Your call will be automatically forwarded to the on-call Technical
calibrate amplitude and frequency characteristics after repair. In Support specialist.
addition, sealing the TXU, TCU, HPU, or optional ACU
enclosures after repair requires exacting techniques and special
fixtures to ensure weather resistance of the units. When contacting Technical Support, please have the following
Therefore, there are NO supported field repairs to either the information available:
TXU, TCU, HPU, or ACU. • Model number and serial number of the unit. This is
Return the entire unit for factory repair. located on a label on the bottom of each unit.
If you attempt field repair, you risk damaging your • Approximate purchase date.
equipment. If your equipment is under warranty, you may also • Radio version, which appears on the TXU or TCU
affect your warranty coverage. alphanumeric display at startup.
- OR -
7.3 Calling for Service • Firmware versions displayed on the Main page of the
MRC Technical Support is available 24 hours a day, 7 days a STRATA TX Configuration Utility when the STRATA TX
week. During regular business hours you can reach our expert Configuration Utility software is connected to your
staff directly. STRATA TX System.
STRATA TX Technical Reference Manual Repair 7-1

STRATA TX Technical Reference Manual Repair 7-2

8 Replacement Parts Table 8-1: STRATA TX System Cables
Description Comments
8.1 Chapter Overview DC to DC Branched Wire Connects the TXU and TCU to the
Harness Assembly ACU for co-located TXU and TCU
This chapter describes which replacement parts are available for (3 ft. / 1 m long) operations.
the STRATA TX System. DC to DC Branched Wire Connectors on all three ends.
Since there are no supported field repairs on the TXU, TCU, Harness Assembly
or HPU, the only parts available are external cables and (10 ft. / 3 m long)
mounting hardware. Power Input Connector Connector only - Mates with TXU
PWR/RS-485 and TCU POWER
connectors.
8.2 External Cables Audio Input Connector Connector only - Mates with TXU and
The external cables for the STRATA TX System are listed in TCU AUDIO connectors.
Table 8-1. If you need something that is not listed, ask your Sales Audio Output Cable Provides input to TXU or TCU AUDIO
Representative or consult the factory. connector from four XLR connectors.
See “Audio Connections” on page 6-
18.
Table 8-1: STRATA TX System Cables Null Modem Cable Connects TXU or TCU RS-232
connector to PC RS-232 connector.
Description Comments For programming and monitoring data
AC Power Cable (115 Connects AC power to the ACU. only. See “Data Connections” on
VAC) page 6-29.
AC Power Cable (230 Multipurpose Data Cable Connects TXU or TCU RS-232
VAC) connector to PC RS-232 connector for
both programming and Wayside data.
DC to DC Wire Harness Connects the TXU or TCU to the ACU. See “Data Connections” on page 6-
Assembly (3 ft. / 1 m long) Connectors on both ends. 29.
DC to DC Wire Harness RF Coaxial Cable (for co- Connects TCU SIGNAL OUT
Assembly (10 ft. / 3 m long) located operation) connector to TXU SIGNAL connector.
RF Coaxial Cable (for
separate TXU and TCU
location operation)
STRATA TX Technical Reference Manual Replacement Parts 8-1

Table 8-1: STRATA TX System Cables Table 8-2: STRATA TX System Mounting Hardware
Description Comments Description Comments

RF Coaxial Cable Connects TXU RF output connector to Fixed Mounting Bracket (2 Provides mounting capabilities for
HPU RF IN connector. Unit Mount) STRATA TX System units to a floor or
Fixed Mounting Bracket (3 bulkhead. Bracket only.
Unit Mount)
8.3 Mounting Hardware
Mounting Tabs Provides mounting tabs to secure
The mounting hardware for the STRATA TX System is listed in STRATA TX System units to a Fixed
Table 8-2. If you need something that is not listed, ask your Sales Mounting Bracket.
Representative or consult the factory. Quick Release Provides quick release mounting
capabilities of the STRATA TX System
units on an MRC tripod
Table 8-2: STRATA TX System Mounting Hardware
Description Comments
Antenna Lock Plate Attaches an MRC antenna directly to
TXU RF output connector, TCU
SIGNAL OUT connector, or HPU RF
output connector.
Universal Mounting Mounts a TXU, TCU, or ACU to a
Bracket tripod. Each bracket accepts 1 unit.
Mounting Plate Provides additional stiffness when
using Universal Mounting Brackets
with multiple units (i.e., TXU, TCU,
and HPU) for tripod mounted
operations.
Aircraft Mounting Bracket Provides mounting capabilities for
STRATA TX System units in an
aircraft instrument panel. Each
bracket accepts 2 units (i.e., TCU and
TXU). Includes bracket and mounting
hardware).
STRATA TX Technical Reference Manual Replacement Parts 8-2

9 Theory of Operation 9.2 System Architecture
The STRATA TX system is designed around a flexible, modular
architecture. System components can be located in the TXU or
9.1 Chapter Overview the TCU depending on your needs.
This chapter provides technical details about the design and The overall STRATA TX System architecture for a fully equipped
functioning of the STRATA TX System. This chapter is intended TX System consisting of a TXU, TCU, and an HPU is shown in
to complement the information in the “Product Description” Figure 9-2 on page 9-5.
Chapter on page 2-1.
Primary STRATA TX System features are as follows:
The descriptions in this chapter will assume you are already
familiar with all the information in Chapter 2. We recommend you • Light Weight, Modular, Multi-unit Design
review that chapter before beginning to read this one. • Analog, Digital, or Analog/digital Switchable
Here are the topics covered: • MPEG Encoding (4:2:0 or 4:2:2)
• COFDM Modulation with Selectable Guard Interval
Topic Page • Digital Modulation for QPSK, 16 QAM, and 64 QAM
System Architecture 9-1 • IF DVB-S Mode Supporting 8 PSK, QPSK, and 16 QAM
TCU Description 9-2 Modulation
TXU Description 9-2 • NTSC or PAL Modulation with Audio (Four Mono or Two
HPU Description 9-2 Stereo)
System Theory of Operation 9-3 • Front Panel Local Control
Command and Control 9-3 • Remote Control
Power Supply
• Bands from 1.9 to 2.5 GHz and 2.3 to 2.7 GHz
MPEG/COFDM Encoder/ 9-3
Modulator Module • Tripod, Half Rack, Or Full Rack Mounts
FMT Module 9-4 • Wide Choice Of Antennas.
TCU 9-4 The TCU and TXU may be operated in standalone
TXU 9-4 configurations depending upon specific video transport
HPU 9-4 applications.
STRATA TX Technical Reference Manual Theory of Operation 9-1

9.2.1 TCU Description 9.2.3 HPU Description
The TCU can accept a wide variety of signal formats and can The optional HPU is available for applications requiring a higher
provide several different output signal formats. Basic functions of RF output power. The HPU can be used to boost the signal level
the TCU are shown in Figure 9-3 on page 9-6. from 2 to 12 watts of microwave output power depending on the
modulation format used. A functional block diagram is shown in
The TCU may contain either an FMT or MPEG/COFDM module
Figure 9-1.
or may contain both modules. The TCU is powered from an
external DC power source, i.e., a STRATA ACU, when operated
Figure 9-1: HPU Functional Block Diagram
in a standalone mode. When operated with a co-located TXU,
the TCU and TXU should both be powered from the same
external DC power source.
When operated with a TXU and the two units are mounted in RF IN HPU RF OUT
different locations, the TCU receives DC power from the TXU or
the TXU receives DC power from the TCU superimposed on the
coaxial cable connected between the two units.
9.2.2 TXU Description

The TXU can accept a wide variety of signal formats and
The HPU may only be used with a TXU and obtains DC power
includes an RF up-converter for use in transporting signals over
from the companion TXU when the TXU is in the transmit mode.
a microwave link. Basic functions of the TXU are shown in
The DC power is superimposed on the coaxial cable between
the TXU and the HPU. The HPU may not be powered separately.
The TXU may contain either an FMT or an MPEG/COFDM
More details about the system configurations available, and
module, but not both modules. Only one option, i.e., either
about which system components can be located in the TXU and
analog or digital modulators, may be provided in a TXU.
the TCU, are found in the “Product Description” Chapter on
The TXU is powered from an external DC power source, i.e., a page 2-1.
STRATA ACU, when operated in a standalone mode. When
operated with a co-located TCU, the TCU and TXU should both
be powered from the same external DC power source.
When operated with a TCU and the two units are mounted in
different locations, the TXU receives DC power from the TCU or
the TCU receives DC power from the TXU superimposed on the
coaxial cable connected between the two units.

9.3 System Theory of Operation input voltage to the DC voltages required by the rest of the TX
System hardware and distribute the appropriate output voltages
The STRATA TX System is comprised of the following primary to the various circuits.
components:
The command and control circuits handle inter-module
• Command and control power supply module communications and provide external RS-232 communications
• MPEG encoder/COFDM modulator module (digital mode) to external peripheral equipment such as a STRATA Remote
Control Panel used in helicopter or vehicle operation or to a PC
• FMT (FM Transmitter) module (analog mode) running the Windows-based STRATA TX Configuration Utility
• TCU software.
• TXU An on-board microprocessor manages the system configuration
and operation of all modules to which it is connected, i.e.,
• HPU
MPEG/COFDM, FMT, IF/RF modules, etc. In addition, for those
Some or all of these components may be included in a fully applications that employ both a TCU and a TXU, a
functional STRATA TX System, depending upon specific communications link superimposed on the IF coaxial cable
customer applications, i.e., a switchable analog and digital between the two units provides communications to all system
transmitting system. modules.
Where switchable analog and digital video transmission is This ensures that the TCU and TXU can control each other’s
required, the digital and analog video modulator modules and operation, i.e., permit switching modes of operation, change
the IF/RF modules are mounted in separate housings. In this system Presets, etc. Therefore, where both a TCU and a TXU
case, the TCU housing will contain the MPEG/COFDM, FMT, are used, total system control may be accomplished using front
and combiner circuits and the TXU housing will contain the IF/RF panel control or remote control from either unit.
unit.
This arrangement also allows the video modulation components 9.3.2 MPEG/COFDM Encoder/Modulator Module
(in the TCU) to be physically separated from the IF/RF up- The optional MPEG/COFDM module is the heart of the STRATA
converter (in the TXU) by up to 600 feet (180 Meters). TX System digital mode circuitry. This circuit may be configured
to accept a wide range of digital or analog video and audio signal
9.3.1 Command and Control Power Supply inputs and provide COFDM (70 MHz), IF (70 MHz), or ASI video
signal outputs.
The TCU and TXU Command and Control Power Supply
modules contain external and internal communications circuitry, When installed in a TCU housing, the various signal inputs and
as well as supplying the necessary system voltages. outputs are connected through the TCU combiner circuit where
they are switched under software control.
The TXU and TCU power supplies accept a wide range of DC
input voltages (+10.5 to +48 VDC). The supplies convert the

9.3.3 FMT Module a 70 MHz COFDM, FMT IF, or external 70 MHz input signal and
up-converts these signals to the appropriate RF band.
The optional FMT module accepts standard NTSC or PAL
analog video and audio signals and FM modulates these signals The RF frequency synthesizer circuit included in the IF/RF
on a 70 MHz carrier. Using the STRATA TX Configuration Utility module, along with the command and control module, provide
software, four different audio sub-carrier frequencies may be the means to channelize RF video and audio signals in the 2
defined in which up to four standard audio signals may be GHz RF band. Standard U.S. FCC band plans, as well as
transported with the associated video signal. customer-created channel plans, may be accommodated using
the STRATA TX Configuration Utility software.
The audio deviation levels are software controlled and must be
provisioned at the factory when ordering this option. The TXU may also include either an MPEG/COFDM or FMT
module (but not both modules), in which case the TXU serves as
9.3.4 TCU a standalone digital or analog video microwave transmission
system.
The TCU may contain either or both digital and analog video
modulation modules. Where a customer application might
9.3.6 HPU
initially employ only analog video transmission but anticipates
migrating to dual (switchable) analog and digital operation, the The optional HPU is designed to work only with a companion
TCU may be upgraded to add the MPEG/COFDM module to TXU. The RF output signals from the TXU are connected to the
provide this additional capability. HPU RF input connector at the rear of the unit. DC power is
provided to the HPU from the TXU via DC voltage superimposed
When only digital or analog video transmission is required, the on the coaxial cable between the units. Power is only applied to
MPEG/COFDM or FMT modules may be installed in a TXU
the HPU from the TXU when the TXU is operating in the transmit
housing, thereby eliminating the need for a TCU. Note that the
mode.
STRATA TX System design does not permit splitting digital and
analog video modulator modules between a TXU and a TCU. In analog microwave transmission, the RF output from the TXU
is amplified, operating the HPU RF amplifier in the non-linear
A TCU configuration may also include a standalone option where
region (saturated) providing RF output levels at the 12 watt level
either or both MPEG/COFDM and FMT modules may be used (+41dBm).
independently of the TXU. This arrangement permits using a
TCU equipped with analog and/or digital video modulation In digital microwave transmission where COFDM RF signals are
modules for a variety of signal input and output configurations, used, software-controlled back-off attenuation is applied to
including a digital option converting NTSC or PAL composite operate the HPU RF amplifier in the linear region. These back-off
video input into ASI (digital) signal output. levels are carefully measured and are configured as part of
factory adjustment procedures and ensure digital mode RF
9.3.5 TXU output signals provide optimum performance.
The TXU always contains the IF/RF module which accepts either Therefore, depending on what digital mode modulation format is

selected, i.e., QPSK, 16 QAM, or 64 QAM, or if an HPU is used, stored in the TXU IF/RF unit and are applied depending on which
previously configured transmitter back-off levels are applied to particular operating mode is selected. Typical digital mode RF
ensure the STRATA TX System RF output signals operate with levels vary from 2 watts to 5 watts output depending mostly on
minimum Inter-Modulation Distortion (IMD). the modulation format selected.
These carefully measured and configured back-off levels are
Figure 9-2: STRATA TX System Architecture
1.84 MHz OOK Tone
Telemetry Telemetry
NTSC
PAL SIGNAL RF/DC
SDI IN TCU TXU HPU RF OUT
ASI
IF
DC Power and/or IF
RS-232 +10.5 to +48 VDC RS-232 +10.5 to +48 VDC

Figure 9-3: TCU Functional Block Diagram
SDI/ASI ASI
MPEG MON
MPEG Monitor
Encoder (MON)
MPEG
CV
COFDM IF
70 MHz
SIGNAL IN SIGNAL
COFDM OUT
Modulator
NTSC COFDM IF
PAL Analog IF
SDI IF
ASI DVB-S
IF NOTE: Either or both MPEG/COFDM and ASI
FILTER
FMT boards may be installed.
Note: ASI Available in

TCU Standalone Mode
Only)
Analog IF
FMT CV 70 MHz
Telemetry
FMT +
Coax Power
70 MHz IF Bypass

Figure 9-4: TXU Functional Block Diagram
SDI
MPEG
MPEG
MPEG ASI
SDI/ASI CV COFDM
COFDM
ASI Input 70 MHZ
RF OUT
SIGNAL IN IF
NTSC 70 MHz
PAL CV
SDI
ASI Up Converter + Amplifier
IF Filter FMT CV 70 MHZ
FMT
Inter-Unit
Communcitaion
Link


A Channels & A.2 Initial Factory Presets
This section lists the channels and frequencies for each RF band
Frequencies covered by the STRATA TX System. These frequencies are
preset at the factory, but can be modified using the STRATA TX
Configuration Utility software. The 2 GHz channel plan is shown
A.1 Appendix Overview in Table A-1.
This Appendix presents the channels and frequencies that were

programmed into your STRATA TX System at the factory. It also
Note These frequency settings should only be changed
by qualified technical personnel.
provides the frequencies set by the latest US frequency
reallocation plan.
Contact the Society of Broadcast Engineers (SBE) coordinator
Here are the topics covered: for up-to-date information on local frequency plans for Electronic
News Gathering (ENG) and Remote Pickup (RPU) operations.
Topic Page
Table A-1: 2 GHz Channel Plan
Initial Factory Presets A-1
US 2 GHz Reallocation - 12 MHz A-2 (-) Offset (0) Center (+) Offset
Channel
Channel Plan (MHz) (MHz) (MHz)
1 1994.750 1999.000 2003.250
2 2012.250 2016.500 2020.750
3 2029.250 2033.500 2037.750
4 2046.250 2050.500 2054.750
5 2063.250 2067.500 2071.750
6 2080.250 2084.500 2088.750
7 2097.250 2101.500 2105.750
8 2454.250 2458.500 2462.750
9 2471.250 2475.500 2479.750
10 2487.750 2492.000 2496.250
STRATA TX Operator’s Guide/Tech Ref Manual Channels & Frequencies A-1

A.3 US 2 GHz Reallocation - 12 MHz
Channel Plan
The frequencies that will be used on the 2 GHz band in the new
US 12 MHz channel plan are shown in Table A-2. Your STRATA
TX System is pre-programmed with the frequencies listed in
Section A.2 on page A-1. However, as your station migrates to
the new channel plan, you can easily reprogram your STRATA
TX System using the STRATA TX Configuration Utility software.
Information below was obtained from the FCC Web site,
document # FCC 03-280:
http://hraunfoss.fcc.gov/edocs_public/attachmatch/FCC-03-
280A1.pdf
Table A-2: 2 GHz Band - US 12 MHz Channel Plan
(-) Offset (0) Offset (+) Offset

Channel
(MHz) (MHz) (MHz)
1 2028.5 2031.5 2034.5
2 2040.5 2043.5 2046.5
3 2052.5 2055.5 2058.5
4 2064.5 2067.5 2070.5
5 2076.5 2070.5 2073.5
6 2088.5 2091.5 2094.5
7 2100.5 2103.5 2106.5
8 2454.25 2458.5 2462.75
9 2471.25 2475.5 2479.75
10 2487.75 2492.0 2496.25
STRATA TX Operator’s Guide/Tech Ref Manual Channels & Frequencies A-2

B Glossary Table B-1: Useful Terms (Continued)
8QAM 8-state Quadrature Amplitude Modulation
This section describes acronyms and abbreviations used in The signal (video + audio) is imposed onto the 70
communications, broadcasting, and in our products and MHz carrier by varying both the phase and the
documentation. amplitude of the signal while keeping the frequency
constant. There are 8 possible combinations of
phase and amplitude that can be used to carry
Table B-1: Useful Terms information.
1RU 1 Rack Unit 64QAM 64-state Quadrature Amplitude Modulation
16QAM 16-state Quadrature Amplitude Modulation
The signal (video+audio) is imposed onto the 70 MHz
carrier by varying both the phase and the amplitude
The signal (video + audio) is imposed onto the 70
of the signal while keeping the frequency constant.
MHz carrier by varying both the phase and the
There are 64 possible combinations of phase and
amplitude of the signal while keeping the frequency
amplitude that can be used to carry information.
constant. There are 16 possible combinations of
phase and amplitude that can be used to carry A&C Alarm and Control
information. ACU AC to DC Converter Unit
3RU 3 Rack Unit ADPCM Adaptive Differential Pulse Code Modulation
32QAM 32-state Quadrature Amplitude Modulation AES Audio Engineering Society
AES/EBU Unofficial name for a digital audio standard
The signal (video + audio) is imposed onto the 70
developed as a joint enterprise of the AES and the
MHz carrier by varying both the phase and the
EBU.
amplitude of the signal while keeping the frequency
constant. There are 32 possible combinations of AFC Automatic Frequency Control
phase and amplitude that can be used to carry AGC Automatic Gain Control
information. AIS Alarm Indication Signal (all one’s)
AMI Alternate Mark Inversion, line code format for traffic
4 FSK 4-state Frequency Shift Keying data.
8 PSK 8-Phase Shift Keying AVG Average
STRATA TX Operator’s Guide/Tech Ref Manual Glossary B-1

Table B-1: Useful Terms (Continued) Table B-1: Useful Terms (Continued)
ASI Asynchronous Serial Interface BISS-1 BISS encryption that uses a fixed key.
BISS-E BISS encryption that uses an encrypted key.
A serial communications interface operating at
270 Mbit/sec., generally used in field news-gathering BNC Bayonet lock coaxial connector
operations. BPF Band Pass Filter
ASYNC Asynchronous bps or b/sec Bits per second
BPSK Binary Phase Shift Keying
Digital communication in which there is no timing
BW Bandwidth
requirement for transmission and in which the start of
each character is individually signaled by the CCITT International Telegraph and Telephone Consultative
transmitting device. Committee
Baseband A composite signal in which video and audio signals
A telecommunications standardizing committee of
are combined together, with video occupying
the ITU.
approximately 0-4.5 MHz and audio modulated onto
subcarriers in the 5-6 MHz range. Also called CCPS Command & Control Power Supply
Composite. CENELEC European Committee for Electrotechnical
BB Baseband Standardization
BDC Block Down Converter CNR Carrier-to-Noise Ratio
BER Bit Error Ratio COFDM Coded Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing
Composite A band or grouping of frequencies and/or subcarriers,
The ratio of bits containing errors to the total number (Baseband) including video, occupied by the signal in a radio
of bits in the signal, over a time period. transmission system. Also called Baseband.
BiasT A type of interconnection between the IDU and the CR4 Code Runner 4
ODU. In Bias T wiring, IF and DC are combined and
CSI Channel-State Information
carried on the coax cable up the ODU; blocking
circuitry prevents the DC from entering the IDU. CV Composite Video
BISS Basic Interoperable Scrambling System
Video signal in which the chrominance (color) and
luminance (brightness) information are combined in
A means of encrypting and decrypting a digital signal
one signal. S-Video separates the chrominance and
to prevent unauthorized reception. The encryption
luminance into individual signals.
and decryption are controlled by a digital key, which
is shared at both the transmitting and receiving CW Carrier Wave
location. DAB Digital Audio Broadcasting

dB Decibel DVB-ASI Digital Video Broadcasting - Asynchronous Serial
Interface
A logarithmic measurement of power or voltage,
applied to audio and RF signals. A widely-used MPEG-2 digital transport interface.
dBm A unit of measurement referenced to one milliwatt. Physically the connection is made either with optical
fiber or 75 ohm coax with a BNC connector. Interface
DCC Distribution Command and Control can support data rates up to 270 Mb/sec.
DCE Data Communications Equipment DVB-C Digital Video Broadcasting - Cable
A device that communicates with a DTE device. In DVB-S Digital Video Broadcasting - Satellite
practical terms, the DCE is usually a modem and the DVB-T Digital Video Broadcasting - Terrestrial
DTE device is usually a computer. E1 2.048 Mbps data rate.
De- Reducing the amplitude of high frequency E3 34.368 Mbps data rate
emphasis components of an analog audio signal. Done on the
receive end of an analog link to take out Emphasis EIA Electronic Industries Association
added on the transmit side.
An industry association that establishes various
DFT Discrete Fourier Transform standards.
DMUX, Demultiplexer EBU European Broadcasting Union
DEMUX
DQPSK Differential Quadrature (Quaternary) Phase-Shift In addition to other activities, EBU produces technical
Keying statements and recommendations for PAL television
DRL Data Return Link systems.
DS3 Digital Signal 3 EMC Electromagnetic compatibility.
Emphasis Boosting the amplitude of high frequency
44.736 Mbps data rate. components of an analog audio signal. Done on the
DTE Data Terminal Equipment transmit side of an analog link to improve signal-to-
noise ratio.
A device that communicates with a DCE device. In ENG Electronic News Gathering
practical terms, the DTE is usually a computer and ERRS Errors
the DCE device is usually a modem.
ESD Electrostatic Discharge
Duplex A channel capable of transmitting information
simultaneously in both directions. ET Eastern Time (US)
DVB Digital Video Broadcasting ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute

EVM Error Vector Magnitude IMD Inter-Modulation Distortion
FCC Federal Communications Commission I/O Input/Output
IRD Integrated Receiver Decoder
The United State's communications regulatory
agency. IRE 1. Institute of Radio Engineers, an international
professional radio engineering association that
FDM Frequency Division Multiplexing establishes various standards.
FEC Forward Error Corrections 2. A unit of measurement, established by the IRE, in
FFT Fast Fourier Transform which 1 IRE Unit =.00714 volts peak-to-peak (Vp-p)
and 140 IRE units equals 1 Vp-p.
FIFO First In, First Out buffer
ISI Inter-Symbol Interference
FIR Finite Impulse Response
ISO International Standards Organization
FMT FM Video Modulator or FM Transmitter
kbps Kilobits per second
FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array
kHz Kilo (1,000) cycles per second
FSK Frequency-Shift Keying
LAN Local Area Network
FW Firmware
LBO Line Build Out
GHz Gigahertz (109 cycles per second)
LCD Liquid Crystal Display
GI Guard Interval
Lcl Local
GND Ground
LED Light Emitting Diode
GUI Graphic User Interface
LIU Line Interface Unit
HDB3 High Density Bipolar 3 line code format for traffic
LNA Low Noise Amplifier
data.
LNB Low Noise Block Down Converter
HPF High Pass Filter
LNC Low Noise Converter
HPU High Power Unit
LO Local Oscillator
H/W or HW Hardware
LOS Loss of Signal
ICI Inter-Carrier Interference
LPF Low Pass Filter
ICR Inter-City Relay
LQ Link Quality
ID Identification
Mbps Megabits per second
IDU Indoor Unit
MHz Million (1,000,000) cycles per second
IF Intermediate Frequency

MPEG Moving Picture Experts Group PAL Phase Alteration Line
M-QAM M-order of Quadrature Amplitude Modulation
Color television standard used in many European
MRC Microwave Radio Communications countries. Provides 625 horizontal lines of resolution.
Multipath An unpredictable set of reflections and/or direct Not compatible with NTSC or SECAM.
waves, each with its own degree of attenuation and PAL-M Phase Alteration Line
delay. Due to obstacles and reflectors in the wireless
channel, transmitted signals arrive at the received Color television standard used in many European
from various directions over multiple paths. countries. Provides 625 horizontal lines of resolution
MUX Multiplexer with 50 lines per field. Not compatible with NTSC or
NC Normally Closed (Relay or switch contacts) SECAM.
N/C No Connection PAL-N Phase Alteration Line
NICAM Near-Instantaneous Companding and Multiplexing
Color television standard used in many European
NO Normally Open (Relay or switch contacts) countries. Provides 525 horizontal lines of resolution
NRZ Non-Return-to-Zero (Modulation) with 60 lines per field. Not compatible with NTSC or
SECAM.
NTSC National Television System Committee
PC Personal Computer
Color television standard used in the US. Provides PCR Program Clock Reference
525 horizontal lines of resolution. Not compatible with
PER Parity Error Rate
PAL or SECAM.
ØLK Phase Lock
Null modem An RS-232 cable designed to connect two computers
cable (or other data sources) together. It has male DB9 PID Program Identification
connectors on each end, to mate with the DB9 PLL Phase Lock Loop
female connectors on the PCs. It also has the PRBS Pseudo Random Bit Sequence
Transmit and Receive connections crossed over so
Transmit (pin 3) on one end connects to Receive (pin QAM Quadrature Amplitude Modulation
2) on the other. QPSK Quadrature Phase Shift Keying
Also called “Crossover Cable”. The signal (video+audio) is imposed onto the 70 MHz
ODU Outdoor Unit carrier by varying the phase of the signal while
keeping the amplitude and frequency constant. There
OFDM Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing are 4 possible values of phase that can be used to
OOK On-Off Keying carry information.

RCL Received Carrier Level SECAM Sequence de Couleur Avec Memoire
The strength of a received RF signal, in dBm. Color television standard used in France, Russia,
RCU Receiver Control Unit and other countries. Provides 625 horizontal lines of
resolution. Not compatible with NTSC or PAL. Not
RCL Received Carrier Level supported by this product.
Rcvr Receiver SER Symbol Error Rate
RD Receive Data Setpt Set point
RDS Radio Data System SFN Single-Frequency Network
RF Radio Frequency
RF Level RF Power from the transmitter.
RFU Radio Frequency Unit
RMA Return Material Authorization
RPU Remote Pickup
R-S Reed-Solomon
RSSI Receiver Signal Strength Indicator
RX Receiver
RXU Receiver Unit
RZ Return to Zero
SBE Society of Broadcast Engineers
SC Service Channel
SC Single Carrier
SCM Single Carrier Modem
SD EMB Synchronous Digital Interface Embedded
SDI Synchronous Digital Interface
A serial communications interface operating at

270 Mbit/sec. Generally used for in-studio news
operations.

C Configurator Reference C.3 Working With the Configuration
Utility
C.1 Appendix Overview This section provides details of how to interact with the STRATA
TX Configuration Utility and its pages, tabs, buttons, and menus.
This appendix provides detailed information on how to install and
operate the STRATA TX Configuration Utility software. Here are the topics covered:
The topics covered in this Appendix are listed below. Topic Page
Tabs, Pages and Buttons C-1
Topic Page
Progress Bars C-4
Configuration Utility Overview C-1
Load and Program Options C-4
Working With the Configuration C-1
Utility
C.3.1 Tabs, Pages and Buttons
Configuration Utility Pages C-7
Front Panel vs. Configurator C-22 The STRATA TX Configuration Utility has an easy-to-use
Graphical User Interface (GUI). The settings are grouped into
PC Requirements C-23
pages according to function. The pages are accessed using
Installing the Configuration Utility C-23 tabs along the bottom of the screen. Pages also contain option
Configurator Troubleshooting C-25 buttons, pull-down menus, text boxes, and check boxes to select
TX System Compatibility C-29 or activate different functions. and options
Tabs There are seven tabs across the bottom of the STRATA
TX Configuration Utility screen. These tabs correspond to the
C.2 Configuration Utility Overview seven pages of settings available. See Figure C-1 on page C-2.
The STRATA TX Configuration Utility is a Windows-based To select a page, just click on a tab.
software application that enables you to control settings on your Greyed-Out Tabs If a page is unavailable, the tab label will
STRATA TX System and tailor them exactly to your needs. appear in grey. For example, in Figure C-1 on page C-2, all tabs
Configuration settings must be configured on-line connected to a are grey except the Main tab because the STRATA TX System
TX System through an RS-232 link to make changes. Channel has not been connected to the STRATA TX Configuration Utility
plans can be created either on-line or offline, however. Both software at this time.
configurations and channel plans can be saved to files and can Pages Each page contains settings or options that apply to that
be recalled later. function. For example, the FMT page shown in Figure C-2 on
page C-2 contains all the settings and options that apply to the
FMT analog modulator.
STRATA TX Technical Reference Manual Configurator Reference C-1

Figure C-1: Main Page with Greyed-Out Tabs - Typical and to execute loading and saving settings to and from files on
your PC. See Figure C-1. Each of the option buttons are
described later in this Appendix.
Figure C-2: FMT Tab Settings - Typical
Greyed-out Choices If some choices or settings do not apply,

they will appear in grey. For example, on the FMT page shown
in Figure C-2, Preset 1 thru Preset 7 and the Video Deviation
selections for those particular Presets are grey. That is because
this radio does not have the Radio page Operation Mode options Greyed-out Option Buttons If the action controlled by an
for these Presets enabled for the Analog IF Out operation option button is unavailable, the button label will appear in grey.
modes. For example, in Figure C-1, the buttons Load Settings from
Option Buttons On all pages, labelled buttons are provided to Radio and Program Radio are grey, because the STRATA TX
make selections. In some cases, this will be to select the Preset Configuration Utility has not yet connected to a TX System, so
for the settings you wish to change. On all pages, option buttons there is no radio to communicate with.
are provided to load settings from, or program settings to, the Similarly, in Figure C-2, Preset 1 thru Preset 7 buttons are grey,
STRATA TX System. See Figure C-2. because in this radio, only Preset 8 and Preset 9 are configured
On the Main page, option buttons are also provided to control for analog (FMT) operation, so there are no FMT page settings
communication between your PC and the STRATA TX System to be made in Preset 1 thru Preset 7.

Dynamic Button Labels When you click on certain labelled Figure C-4: Pull-Down Menu - Typical
button to execute an action, the label on the button changes to
keep you apprised of the status. For example, in Figure C-3,
when the Program Radio button is clicked, the label changes to Pull-Down
read Programming, then reads Verifying, and finally reads Menu
Program Radio when programming is complete.
Similarly, the Load Page button, contained on all pages except
the Main page, changes to Loading when clicked and returns to
Load Page when loading is complete.
Figure C-3: Program Radio Option Button Check Boxes Check boxes are also provided on the MPEG
and FMT pages. Selection of a check box will enable an option
(checked) or disable an option (not checked). See Figure C-5.
Figure C-5: Check Box - Typical
Check
Program Boxes
Radio Option
Button
Radio Buttons Radio buttons are provided to make a selection

between two options. See Figure C-6 on page C-4.
Menus Pull-down menus are contained on all pages except the
Chan Plan page. Pull-down menus are provided to select
certain options. In the example shown in Figure C-4, the Radio
page Operation Mode pull-down menu allows selection of
MPEG IF Out, MPEG-ASI Out, COFDM-ASI In, Ext IF In,
Analog IF Out, or DVB-Satellite mode of operation for each
individual Preset.

Figure C-6: Radio Buttons - Typical when programming settings to the TX System on the individual
pages. See Figure C-8.
Radio
Buttons Figure C-8: Progress Bar - Typical
Progress Bar
Text Boxes Text boxes are contained on the Radio, MPEG,

DVBS, and Chan Plan pages. In the example shown in Figure
C-7, text boxes are provided for both the Video Provider Service:
name and the Network: name to allow you to change the names,
as required.
Figure C-7: Text Boxes - Typical
Text Boxes
Progress bars provide an estimate of the time remaining to

complete a particular process. Progress bars occasionally may
not be observed, as loading or saving settings occurs almost
instantaneously.
C.3.2 Progress Bars C.3.3 Load and Program Options

The STRATA TX Configuration Utility provides progress bars The STRATA TX Configuration Utility gives you the ability to
located near the top of the individual pages. The progress bars create, modify, save, and load STRATA TX System
are observed only when loading settings from the TX System or configurations or channel plans. Configurations must be created

or modified on-line. Channel plans may be created or modified Load or Program Entire Radio Loading or programming
both on-line and offline. settings for the entire radio is done on the Main page of the
Configurations The STRATA TX Configuration Utility software STRATA TX Configuration Utility using the Load Settings from
gives you the following options to prepare, modify, save, or load Radio button or the Program Radio button. See Figure C-9.
configuration settings into your STRATA TX System: When you are loading from the entire radio, all of the current
• Create a new configuration settings in the TX System, including the channel plan, are loaded
into the STRATA TX Configuration Utility and appear on-screen.
• Load and modify a configuration from a file on your PC
When you are programming the entire radio, all of the current
• Load and modify individual pages settings from all of the STRATA TX Configuration Utility pages
• Load and modify individual Presets are programmed into the STRATA TX System. Old settings will
be replaced.
• Save configurations to a file on your PC
• Program individual page or Preset settings into your TX Figure C-9: Main Page - Load Settings from Entire Radio
System
• Program a new configuration into your TX System.
Note that configurations must all be created or modified with the
STRATA TX System powered up and connected to the STRATA
TX Configuration Utility software.
Loading or programming the entire radio is the best choice when
you have many changes to make. When the changes are more
limited, loading/programming a single page or a single preset will
save time.
Channel Plans The STRATA TX Configuration Utility software
gives you the following options to prepare, modify, save, or load
channel plan settings into your STRATA TX System:
• Create a new channel plan offline
• Load and modify a channel plan from a file on your PC
• Load and modify a channel plan from your TX System
Load or Program a Single Page Loading or programming a
• Save channel plans to a file on your PC single page is performed on the STRATA TX Configuration Utility
• Program a channel plan into your TX System. page you want to work with. All pages, except the Main page,

has option buttons for Load Page and Program Page. Configuration Utility pages. Then you return to the Main page,
select the Preset using the pull-down menu, and select the
For example, if you are changing settings only on the Radio
Program Preset button. See Figure C-11. All changes to the
page, you would use the Load Page and Program Page buttons
Preset are then programmed into the TX System.
on that page. See Figure C-10.
Figure C-11: Main Page - Program an Individual Preset
Note When you program a single page, the STRATA TX
Configuration Utility only programs the settings on
that page to the radio - even if you changed
settings on other pages as well.
Figure C-10: Radio Page - Load a Single Page
Note When you program an individual Preset, the

STRATA TX Configuration Utility only programs the
settings for that Preset into the radio - even if you
changed settings on other Presets as well.
When you select the Program Preset button, the Program

Load or Program Individual Presets Loading or programming Preset button label will change to Programming and the
an individual Preset is performed on the Main page. You first set progress bar located above the Load Settings from Radio will
up the details for that Preset using the other STRATA TX appear indicating the programming progress. When

programming is complete, the button label will then change to • Load settings to a specific Preset.
Verifying, as verification of the loading process is completed, Figure C-12: Main Page - Typical
and will change to Program Preset when programming is
complete.
C.4 Configuration Utility Pages

This section describes the different pages available in the
STRATA TX Configuration Utility software, and settings made on
each page.
Here are the topics covered:
Topic Page
Main Page C-7
Radio Page C-9
COFDM Page C-13
MPEG Page C-15
FMT Page C-18
DVBS Page C-20 The Main page contains the STRATA Control option buttons
Channel Plan Page C-21 and the STRATA TXU and STRATA TCU option buttons and text
boxes to display the versions of the modules contained in your
C.4.1 Main Page STRATA TX System.
The Main page is shown in Figure C-12. This is the page that Com Port Pull-Down Menu The COM port pull-down menu is
displays when the STRATA TX Configuration Utility starts used to select the COM port used by your PC to connect to the
running, or when you click on the Main tab. TX System. Drop-down menu options are [Auto Detect] and
COM 1 thru COM 9.
You will use the Main page to:
If you know your PC COM port number, use the drop-down menu
• Establish a data connection to the TX System
to select it. Otherwise, select [Auto Detect]. Selecting your
• Load settings from, and save settings to, a file on your PC actual COM port number may speed up the connection process
• Load settings from, and program settings to, the TX between your PC and the TX System.
System

Connect to Radio Option Button When you are connected to Load Settings from Radio Option Button The Load Settings
the TX System via an RS-232 link and your TX System is from Radio is active only when the TX System is connected to
powered up, select the Connect to Radio option button to your PC. When the Load Settings from Radio option button is
connect your PC to the TX System. The Connect to Radio selected, all configuration settings from your TX System are
option button label will change to read Disconnect Port-X where loaded into the STRATA TX Configuration Utility software.
X is your PC COM port when the connection process is
The Load Settings from Radio button label changes to read
complete. During the connection process, a progress bar is
Loading during the loading process and then changes to read
Load Settings from Radio when the loading process is
Preset Pull-Down Menu and Program Preset Option Button complete. During the loading process, a progress bar is
When the TX System is connected, the Preset drop-down menu displayed near the top of the Main page.
will be active. To program a specific Preset into your TX System, Program Entire Radio Option Button The Program Entire
the Preset to be programmed must be selected using the drop- Radio is active only when the TX System is connected to your
down menu. PC. When the Program Entire Radio option button is selected,
The Program Preset option button programs configuration all configuration settings from the STRATA TX Configuration
settings from all applicable pages into the TX System for the Utility software are loaded into your TX System.
selected Preset only. When the Program Preset option button The Program Entire Radio button label changes to read
is selected, the button label changes to read Programming, Programming during the programming process, then changes
then changes to read Verifying, and finally reads Program to read Verifying, and finally changes to read Program Entire
Preset when the programming is complete. During the Radio when the programming process is complete. During the
programming process, a progress bar is displayed near the top programming process, a progress bar will be displayed near the
of the Main page. top of the Main page.
Load Settings from File Option Button The Load Settings About Option Button Selecting the About option button
from File option button is used to load configuration settings displays the About MRC PTX-PRO Configurator window. See
from a file on your PC. Figure C-13 on page C-9.
Once the file is loaded into the STRATA TX Configuration Utility
software, the configuration settings may be modified and saved
to a file or may be loaded into a TX System. The modified
configuration settings may be saved to a file, and do not have to
be programmed into the TX System.
Load Settings to File Option Button The Load Settings to
File option button is used to save configuration settings to a file
on your PC.

Figure C-13: About MRC PTX-PRO Configurator Window Figure C-14: STRATA TXU Configuration Option Buttons
The About MRC Strata Configurator window allows you to

compare the version number displayed on your TX System
alphanumeric display when the unit is initially powered up. Figure C-15: STRATA TCU Configuration Option Buttons
The version listed in the About MRC Strata Configurator
window For use with... line is the minimum version of the TX
System required (i.e., the TX System should be that version or
higher). If your TX System is at that version or higher, there are
no compatibility issues. If your TX System version falls below
that minimum, contact MRC to check for any compatibility
issues.
STRATA TXU and STRATA TCU Configuration Option
Buttons When your TX System is connected to the STRATA TX
Configuration Utility software, the STRATA TXU and/or STRATA
TCU configuration option buttons will automatically be selected.
See Figure C-14 and Figure C-15. The Radio, COFDM, MPEG, C.4.2 Radio Page
FMT, DVBS, and Chan Plan will be enabled, as applicable to A typical Radio page is shown in Figure C-16 on page C-10.
your TX System configuration. In addition, the versions of all This is the page that displays when you select the Radio tab.
modules contained in your TX System will be displayed in the
text boxes.

Figure C-16: Radio Page - Typical Figure C-17: Preset Text Selection - Typical
Select Operation Mode Select the Operation Mode using the

pull-down menu button for each Preset, as required. See
Figure C-18.
Figure C-18: Operation Mode Drop-Down Menu Options
You will use the Radio page to define settings for each of the
nine available Presets. For each Preset you can perform the
following:
Enter Custom Preset Text Enter a custom Preset Name for
each Preset (12 alphanumeric characters maximum), as
The Operation Mode selection choices are as follows:
required. See Figure C-17. Use your mouse to highlight the
existing Preset Name for the required Preset and enter the new • MPEG IF Out
text required. 70 MHz COFDM IF output from the internal MPEG/
COFDM digital module is supplied to the TCU SIGNAL
OUT and MON. connectors and to the TXU, if present.
• MPEG-ASI Out
Supplies a DVB ASI transport stream to the TCU SIGNAL
OUT and MON. connectors. This mode is accessed only
when the TCU is operated in a standalone configuration.

• COFDM-ASI In
Bypasses the internal MPEG encoder and routes an Note The Color Bars options are active (not greyed out)
externally supplied ASI stream to the TCU SIGNAL OUT only if the Preset Operation Mode selected on the
and MON. connectors and to the TXU, if present. Radio page is MPEG IF Out, MPEG-ASI Out, or
DVB-Satellite.
• Ext. IF In
70 MHz IF input signal from the TCU SIGNAL IN connector • PAL - 625 line video in PAL format
is routed through the TCU to the TXU, if present.
• NTSC - 525 line video in NTSC format.
• Analog IF Out
Routes 70 MHz FM output to the TXU, if present. This • OFF - Color bars turned off
mode is only supported with the FMT option installed. • Auto - Color bars display at loss of video.
• DVB-Satellite Select Preset IF CW Tone Options Select Preset IF CW Tone
DVB-S (Satellite) mode uses a single carrier modulator options by clicking on the IF CW Tone button to toggle choices
and supplies a configurable DVB-S signal to the TCU for each Preset, as required. See Figure C-20. The choices are
SIGNAL OUT and MON. rear panel connectors. DVB-S is as follows:
operational for QPSK, 16 QAM, and 8 PSK modulation
formats. Figure C-20: IF CW Tone Options - Typical
DVB-Satellite is operational in TCU standalone
configurations only, i.e., no TXU present. 16 QAM and 8
PSK modulation formats require an enhanced features
license key and MRC activation.
Select Preset Color Bars Options Select Preset Color Bars
options using the pull-down menu button for each Preset, as
required. See Figure C-19. Choices are as follows:
Figure C-19: Color Bars Options Note The IF CW Tone options are active only if the
Preset Operation Mode selected on the Radio
page is MPEG IF Out, MPEG-ASI Out, or DVB-
Satellite.
• OFF - Carrier wave tone is off.

• ON - Carrier wave tone is on.

Enter Preset Transmitter Back-off Attenuation Level Enter Figure C-22: Load Page and Program Page Option Buttons
transmitter Back-off attenuation level for each individual Preset,
as required.
Note The transmitter Back Off attenuation levels may

be set for each Preset Operation Mode selected
on the Radio page except MPEG-ASI Out.
Use mouse to highlight the existing Back-off attenuation level

for the required Preset and enter the new attenuation level
required. See Figure C-21. Attenuation levels may be entered
from 0 to 31 dB in 1 dB increments. (Moving the cursor into the
Back-off text box will display Range: 0 to 31 after a very short
delay.)
Figure C-21: Back Off Attenuation Level Text Box - Typical
The Load Page button changes to read Loading during the

loading process and then changes to read Load Page when the
loading process is complete. During the loading process, a
progress bar is displayed near the top of the Radio page.
Program Radio Page Settings Option Button The Program
Load Radio Settings from Radio Option Button The Load Page option button is active only in the on-line mode when the
Page option button is active only when the TX System is TX System is connected to your PC. When the Program Page
connected to the STRATA TX Configuration Utility software. option button is selected, only Radio page configuration settings
are loaded into your TX System.
When the Load Page option button is selected, only Radio page
configuration settings from your TX System are loaded into the The Program Page button changes to read Programming
STRATA TX Configuration Utility software. See Figure C-22. during the programming process, then changes to read
Verifying, and finally changes to read Program Page when the
programming process is complete. During the loading process,
a progress bar is displayed near the top of the Radio page.

C.4.3 COFDM Page Figure C-24: Modulation Pull-Down Menu
A typical COFDM page is shown in Figure C-23. This page is
displayed when the COFDM tab is selected and the TX System
contains an MPEG/COFDM digital module.
Figure C-23: COFDM Page - Typical
For a Preset with an Operation Mode of MPEG IF Out or

COFDM - ASI In, Modulation selection choices are as follows:
• QPSK
The audio and video is imposed onto the 70 MHz carrier
by varying the phase while keeping the frequency
constant. There are four possible combinations of phase
that can be used to carry information.
• 16 QAM
constant. There are 16 possible combinations of phase
and amplitude that can be used to carry information.
• 64 QAM
The COFDM page is used to define specific Preset settings for The audio and video is imposed onto the 70 MHz carrier
the applicable Operation Mode selected on the Radio page. by varying the phase while keeping the frequency
These settings are as follows: constant. There are 64 possible combinations of phase
Select Modulation Select Modulation for the Preset using the
pull-down menu button for each Preset, as required. See For Presets with the Operation Mode of DVB-Satellite,
Figure C-24. selection choices are as follows:
• QPSK
Audio and video is imposed onto the 70 MHz carrier by
varying the phase while keeping the frequency constant.
There are four possible combinations of phase that can

be used to carry information. • 7 MHz
• 16 QAM • 8 MHz
Select PRESET FEC Select FEC (Forward Error Correction) for
the Preset using the pull-down menu button for each Preset, as
constant. There are 16 possible combinations of phase
required. See Figure C-26.
• 8 PSK Figure C-26: FEC Pull-Down Menu
varying the phase while keeping the frequency constant.
There are eight possible combinations of phase that can
be used to carry information.
Select Preset Bandwidth Select Bandwidth for the Preset
using the pull-down menu button for each Preset, as required.
See Figure C-25.
Figure C-25: Bandwidth Pull-Down Menu For Presets with an Operation Mode of MPEG IF Out,
COFDM - ASI In, and DVB-Satellite, FEC selection choices are
as follows:
• 1/2
One out of every two bits sent is a data bit. The balance
are error-correcting bits.
• 2/3
Two out of every three bits sent are data bits. The
The bandwidth defines the width, in MHz, of the COFDM balance are error-correcting bits.
pedestal. Smaller pedestals may perform better in crowded • 3/4
channels, while larger pedestals provide higher data rates. Three out of every four bits sent are data bits. The
For Presets with an Operation Mode of MPEG IF Out or balance are error-correcting bits.
COFDM - ASI In, Bandwidth selection choices are as follows: • 5/6
• 6 MHz Five out of every six bits sent are data bits. The balance
• 7/8

Seven out of every eight bits sent are data bits. The displayed when the MPEG tab is selected and the TX System
balance are error-correcting bits. contains an MPEG/COFDM digital module.
Select Preset Guard Interval Select the guard interval for the
Preset using the Guard drop-down menu button for each Preset, Figure C-28: MPEG Page - Typical
as required. See Figure C-27.
Figure C-27: Guard Interval Pull-Down Menu
Guard interval is the amount of extra time that a symbol is

transmitted as a fraction of the symbol time. There is a trade-off
between multipath resistance and bit rate; the longer the guard
interval, the more resistant to multipath the link is, i.e., 1/4 is the
most resistant and 1/32 is the highest data rate.
For Presets with an Operation Mode of MPEG IF Out or The MPEG page is used to define certain settings for Presets
COFDM Only - ASI In, guard interval selection choices are as with a Radio page Operation Mode of MPEG/COFDM IF Out,
follows: MPEG Only - ASI Out, or DVB-S (Satellite). Note that only
• 1/32 Presets with these operating modes will be active. Presets with
other operating modes will be inactive (greyed out).
• 1/16
Note that the Preset being configured must be selected by
• 1/8
clicking the applicable Preset button. MPEG page settings
• 1/4 available are as follows:
Select Preset Service Name The Service Name: identifies a
C.4.4 MPEG Page unit or integrated stack by function, location, or type. Use the
A typical MPEG page is shown in Figure C-28. This page is mouse to highlight the existing Service Name: text for the

required Preset and enter the new text (8 characters maximum).
Select Preset Network Name The Network Name: identifies a Table C-1: NTSC Pedestal Levels
station name, network affiliate, or application. Use the mouse to
highlight the existing Network Name: text for the required RX TX Encoder
Preset and enter the new text (8 characters maximum). Decoder
STRATA STRATA Tandberg Tandberg
Select Preset Video Input STRATA TX Systems are pre-
NTSC No NTSC In NTSC No NTSC In
configured at the factory to operate as either an NTSC or a PAL
Pedestal Pedestal Pedestal Pedestal
radio type. Select the Video Input: drop-down menu button for
each Preset, as required. NTSC Video Input: selection choices Tandberg 15 IRE 7.5 IRE 15 IRE 7.5 IRE
Alteria Plus
are as follows:
STRATA RX 7.5 IRE 0 IRE 7.5 IRE 0 IRE
• SDI 525 In No Pedestal
The input to the radio complies with an SDI standard of
STRATA RX 15 IRE 7.5 IRE 15 IRE 7.5 IRE
525 lines of resolution.
Pedestal
• NTSC In (Pedestal)
The NTSC video input to the radio has a pedestal. PAL Video Input: selection choices are as follows:
• NTSC No Pedestal • SDI 625
The NTSC video input does not have a pedestal or you The input to the radio complies with an SDI standard of
don’t wish pedestal to be removed prior to coding. 625 lines of resolution.
When selecting Video Input: NTSC In or NTSC No Pedestal • PAL In
options, note that most Tandberg MPEG decoders automatically Standard PAL video is present at the input to the radio.
add a 7.5 IRE video pedestal, both STRATA and Tandberg • PAL M In
encoders provide a choice of pedestal or no pedestal, and the PAL M video is present at the input to the radio.
STRATA RX decoder permits selection of a pedestal or no
pedestal. • PAL N In
PAL N video is present at the input to the radio.
Using Table C-1, you should select the combination that results
in the desired 7.5 IRE video pedestal. Select Preset Chroma Format Select the Chroma Format:
drop-down menu button for each Preset, as required. The
Chroma Format: selection choices are as follows:
• 4:2:0 - 4:2:0 profile at main level
• 4:2:2 - 4:2:2 profile at main level.

Select Preset Delay Mode Select the Delay Mode: drop-down selected. If either the Audio A Type: MPEG or Linear options
menu button for each Preset, as required. The Delay Mode: are selected, the Audio A Mode: option will be active.
selection choices are Standard and Low.
If the Audio A Mode: option is active, selection choices are
Select Preset ASI Bit Rate Select the ASI Bit Rate: value Stereo and Dual Mono.
using the mouse to highlight the existing value for the required
Select Preset Audio A Input he Audio A Input: option will be
Preset and enter the new value required. The ASI Bit Rate: may
inactive (greyed out) if the Audio A Type: OFF option is
be set from 0 to 16 Mb/s in the 4:2:0 mode and 0 to 30 Mb/s in
selected. If either the Audio A Type: MPEG or Linear options
the 4:2:2 mode.
are selected, the Audio A Input: option will be active.
Note that the ASI Bit Rate: may be changed on Presets with a
If the Audio A Input: option is active, selection choices are as
Radio page Operation Mode of MPEG Only - ASI Out only.
follows:
Select Wayside Channel State Select the Wayside Chan.
• Test Tone
State: drop-down menu button for each Preset, as required. The
An internal, constant frequency, 800 Hz test tone is
Wayside Chan. State: selection choices are as follows:
encoded.
• OFF
• Analog
No Wayside information will be transmitted.
The XLR input is treated as analog and is encoded.
• IRD Comp.
• SDI EMB
Wayside information is transmitted in a format suitable for
The audio is retrieved from the SDI stream attached to the
extraction by an IRD.
video inputs (SDI video mode only).
• STRATA Comp.
• AES EBU
Wayside information is transmitted in a format suitable for
The XLR input is assumed to comply with AES EBU
extraction by a MRC STRATA or RXL decoder product.
digital standard. AES EBU is optional and must be
Select Wayside Channel Baud Rate Select the Wayside factory-enabled.
Chan. Baud Rate: drop-down menu button for each Preset, as
Select Preset Audio B Type Select the Audio B Type: drop-
required. The Wayside Chan. Baud Rate: selection choices are
down menu button for each Preset, as required. The Audio B
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, and 38400.
Type: selection choices are OFF, MPEG, and Linear.
Select Preset Audio A Type Select the Audio A Type: drop-
Select Preset Audio B Mode The Audio B Mode: option will
down menu button for each Preset, as required. The Audio A
be inactive (greyed out) if the Audio B Type: OFF option is
Type: selection choices are OFF, MPEG, and Linear.
selected. If either the Audio B Type: MPEG or Linear options
Select Preset Audio A Mode The Audio A Mode: option will are selected, the Audio B Mode: option will be active.
be inactive (greyed out) if the Audio A Type: OFF option is

If the Audio B Mode: option is active, selection choices are ability to generate secure encrypted keys using the BISS-
Stereo and Dual Mono. E ID and a secret fixed key, then you should consider
Select Preset Audio B Input he Audio B Input: option will be using BISS-1 instead.
inactive (greyed out) if the Audio B Type: OFF option is To enable BISS, enter the key you have selected to enable fixed-
selected. If either the Audio B Type: MPEG or Linear options key encryption. The key must be used by both the transmitting
are selected, the Audio B Input: option will be active. site and the receiving site. The key should be chosen at random
If the Audio B Input: option is active, selection choices are as and should be retained and kept secret.
follows: • BISS-1 Key:
• Test Tone Enter the key you have selected to enable encryption.
• Analog • BISS E Key: and BISS E ID:

Enter the key and ID characters you have selected to
• SDI EMB enable encrypted-key encryption. The same fixed key
• AES EBU must be used to generate the encrypted keys for both the
transmitting and receiving sites.
These selection choices are identical to the Audio A Input:
options. Encryption and Presets The BISS-1 Key: and BISS-E Key:
and ID: can be configured for each Preset.
Enable Preset BISS Basic Interoperable Scrambling System
(BISS) encryption is a factory-enabled option that must be
C.4.5 FMT Page
ordered when you order your STRATA TX System. Encryption
and decryption apply to both the video/audio data and the A typical FMT page is shown in Figure C-29 on page C-19. This
additional Wayside data. page is displayed when the FMT tab is selected and the TX
System contains an FMT analog module.
Once BISS is enabled, you have access to the following settings
using the BISS: pull-down option button. Selection choices are The FMT page is used to define certain settings for Presets with
as follows: their Radio page Operation Mode set to Analog IF Out.
• OFF Only Presets with an Analog IF Out operating mode will be
BISS is disabled. active. Presets with other operating modes will be inactive
(greyed out).
• BISS-1
Encryption using a fixed key.
• BISS-E
Encryption using an encrypted key. BISS-E is used in a
secure key distribution scheme. If you don’t have the

Figure C-29: FMT Page Select Preset Audio Sub-Carrier Configuration For each
active Preset, audio sub-carrier channels 1 thru 4 (See Figure C-
31) can be configured as follows:
Figure C-31: Audio Sub-Carrier Options - Typical
Note that the Preset being configured must be selected by

clicking the applicable Preset button. FMT page settings
available are as follows:
Select Preset Video Deviation Video deviation for individual
Presets may be set to either 3 MHz or 4 MHz by selecting the
radio button next to the Video Deviation frequency required.
See Figure C-30.
• Enable Channel X
Figure C-30: Video Deviation Radio Buttons - Typical When Enable Channel X ( X represents channels 1 thru
4) is selected (checked), that audio channel is turned on.
When not selected (unchecked), turns that audio channel
off.
• Frequency
Sets the subcarrier frequency. The following choices are

selected using the individual channel Frequency: pull- The DVBS page is used to define certain settings for Presets
down menus: with the Radio page Operation Mode set to DVB-Satellite.
4830 kHz 5200 kHz 5800 kHz 6200 kHz Select Modulation Mode For Presets with the Operation
6800 kHz 7020 kHz 7500 kHz 8065 kHz Mode of DVB-Satellite, Modulation pull-down menu selection
8300 kHz 8590 kHz choices are as follows:
• Pre-emphasis • QPSK
When selected (checked), applies pre-emphasis to the Audio and video is imposed onto the 70 MHz carrier by
audio signal. When not selected (unchecked), turns pre- varying the phase, while keeping the frequency constant.
emphasis off. There are four possible combinations of phase that can
C.4.6 DVBS Page • 16 QAM
A typical DVBS page is shown in Figure C-32. This page is Audio and video is imposed onto the 70 MHz carrier by
displayed when the DVBS tab is selected. The DVBS tab will be varying the phase, while keeping the frequency constant.
active if the TX System consists of a TCU only. There are 16 possible combinations of phase that can be
used to carry information.
Figure C-32: DVBS Page - Typical • 8 PSK
varying the phase, while keeping the frequency constant.
There are eight possible combinations of phase that can
Note that a special license is required to use the 16 QAM and 8
PSK modulation types.
Select Preset Symbol Rate Select Symbol rate for Presets
with the Operation Mode of DVB-Satellite using the mouse to
highlight the existing Symbol value for the required Preset and
enter the new rate required.
The Symbol rate (in MHz) may be set from 1.7 to 26.7. (Moving
the cursor into the Symbol text box will display Range: 1.7 to
26.7 after a very short delay.)
Select Preset Forward Error Rate Correction Select the
Preset forward error correction (FEC) by using the FEC pull-

down menu for the required Preset. FEC selection choices are C.4.7 Channel Plan Page
as follows:
A typical channel plan page is shown in Figure C-33. This page
• 1/2 is displayed when the Chan Plan tab is selected. The Chan
One out of every two bits sent is a data bit. The balance Plan page is active only if your STRATA TX System contains a
are error-correcting bits. TXU.
• 2/3
Two out of every three bits sent are data bits. The Figure C-33: Channel Plan Page
balance are error-correcting bits.
• 3/4
Three out of every four bits sent are data bits. The
• 5/6
Five out of every six bits sent are data bits. The balance
• 7/8
Seven out of every eight bits sent are data bits. The
Select Preset Roll Off Select Roll Off for active Presets with
the Operation Mode of DVB-Satellite using the Roll Off pull-
down menu button for each Preset, as required. Roll Off
selection choices are as follows:
• 0.35
• 0.25 The Chan Plan page is used to define the frequencies to be
used in each of 10 available channels and the offsets for each
Select Preset IF Frequency Select IF Frequency for Presets band your TXU is equipped to use.
with the Operation Mode of DVB-Satellite using the mouse to
highlight the existing IF Frequency value for the required Preset The bands available will be configured at the factory when your
and enter the new rate required. The IF Frequency may be set radio is built. After that, the STRATA TX Configuration Utility will
from 59.2 to 80.8. store the channel plan settings in effect when it was last
connected to the TXU. The Configuration Utility will recall those
settings the next time the Configuration Utility software is run, if
those settings were properly saved.

The Channel Plan page provides options for frequencies and Manage the Channel Plan In addition, you can take the
offsets for the 10 available channels. Frequencies can be set in following actions:
the following ways for the 10 channels and offsets: • Clear Channel Plan
• Use the standard frequency plan. - Selecting the Clear option button erases entries for all
• Create custom frequencies and offsets. channels and offsets. This option button is used when
you want to enter a custom channel plan.
For each channel, you can enter the Center frequency and the
Offset- and Offset+ frequencies. • Default Channel Plan
Entering Frequencies Frequencies are changed by using the - Selecting the Default option button fills the 10
mouse to highlight the text box for the required channel channels (and offsets) with the US frequencies
frequency and entering the new frequency required. approved by the FCC for that band.
Observe the following requirements when entering frequencies • Load Plan from File
and offset frequencies: - Selecting the Load File button loads in a channel plan
you have previously saved to a file on your PC.
Note The decimal separator must be a decimal point • Save Plan to File
( . ), not a comma ( , ). If your computer is - Selecting the Save File button saves the currently
configured to use a comma as the decimal displayed channel plan to a file on your PC. The
separator, see “Decimal Separator Compatibility” default directory is “My Documents”.
on page C-29.
• Frequencies must be within the specified frequency limits. C.5 Front Panel vs. Configurator
An entry outside of the defined limits will default to the
The design of the STRATA TX System and STRATA TX
upper limit (e.g., 2500.000 MHz).
Configuration Utility software makes commonly available
• Frequencies must be entered in MHz, with the smallest settings accessible from the TXU and/or TCU front panel and
increment being 0.1 MHz. more advanced settings accessible through the STRATA TX
• Frequencies must follow the format shown in Figure C-33 Configuration Utility.
on page C-21, with no spaces or alphabetic characters. A summary of which settings can be controlled by each method
is provided in “Front Panel vs. STRATA TX Configurator
Settings” on page 3-42.
Note Data may be entered only in active fields. No data
may be entered in fields that are greyed out.
• All fields must be filled - Leave no blank fields.

C.6 PC Requirements Figure C-34: CD Contents Folder - Typical
The STRATA TX Configuration Utility is designed to run on

Windows -based PCs that meet the following requirements:
Operating System Windows 2000 or Windows XP
COM Ports At least one serial port configured as COM1 thru
COM9. If you do not know the COM port number of your PC,
use the [Auto Detect] option on the Main page of the STRSTS
TX Configuration Utility when connecting to the STRATA TX
System for the first time.
Processor Speed 200 MHz minimum
Memory 128K RAM minimum
4. Double-click on the Tx config folder and observe the
CD contents are listed. See Figure C-35.
C.7 Installing the Configuration Utility
Before using the STRATA TX Configuration Utility, it must be Figure C-35: CD Contents - Typical
installed on your PC. To install the Configuration Utility, perform
the following steps.
Note If any version of the STRATA TX Configuration

Utility is already installed, you must remove it Software Contents
before attempting to install a new version. Folder
Use the “Add/Remove Programs” feature in

Windows Control Panel to do this.
1. Locate the CD that was provided for your STRATA TX

System.
5. Double-click on the software contents folder and
2. Insert the CD into your computer CD drive. observe the setup.exe file is listed. See Figure C-36
3. Using the My Computer icon on your PC (or any other on page C-24.
method), navigate to that CD drive and display the CD
contents folder on your screen. See Figure C-34.

Figure C-36: Setup.exe File
Note The installation program will prompt you for the
location where the STRATA TX Configuration
Utility files are to be installed. It is recommended
that you accept the default location of:
C:\Program Files\Strata_TX_Configurator\
Figure C-38: Begin the installation... Window
6. Double-click on the setup.exe file and observe the

STRATA TX Configuration Utility (Customer
Edition) Setup Wizard is displayed. See Figure C-37.
Figure C-37: STRATA TX Configuration Utility (Customer

Edition) Setup Wizard
Installation Option
Button
8. Select the installation option button and observe the

Program Group window is displayed. See Figure C-39
on page C-25.
7. Select the OK option button and observe the Begin

the installation... window is displayed. See Figure C-
38.

Figure C-39: Program Group Window - Typical 12. You can now prepare a shortcut to place the STRATA
TX Configuration Utility icon on your desktop.
C.8 Configurator Troubleshooting

This section provides information so you can troubleshoot and
correct problems that may arise when using the STRATA TX
Configuration Utility.
C.8.1 Configurator Error Messages

The STRATA TX Configuration Utility has a set of self-
diagnostics that will alert you when an operation cannot be
completed.
When there is a problem, a small pop-up window will appear on
your PC display describing the problem. See Figure C-41 for an
9. Select the Program Group: required, select the
example.
Continue option button, and observe the setup
completion window (Figure C-40) is displayed. You can close this error message window by clicking OK.
Figure C-40: Setup Completion Window Figure C-41: Connection Failure Error Message Window
10. Select the OK option button and observe the STRATA

TX Configuration Utility (Customer Edition) Setup
Wizard is no longer displayed.
11. Remove the CD from your CD drive.

Table C-2 provides the most common Configuration Utility error Table C-2: Configurator Error Messages (Continued)
messages and what to do if they occur.
Suggested
For error codes that may appear on the front panel displays of Error Message Possible Cause
Action
the TXU and TCU, see the “Troubleshooting” Chapter on page 4-
1. Cannot Change Required hardware Check configuration
Operation Mode... is not present - i.e., and match to
attempt to program installed hardware.
Table C-2: Configurator Error Messages COFDM settings
when no COFDM
Suggested module is installed.
Error Message Possible Cause
Action Configuration Utility Turn off STRATA TX
Unable to connect to STRATA TX System Turn STRATA TX cannot find installed System power, close
STRATA System power is off. System power ON. hardware. the STRATA TX
Configuration Utility,
RS-232 cable is Connect cable. Be then turn on
disconnected. sure connectors on STRATA TX System
both ends are fully power and start
seated. STRATA TX
RS-232 cable is Replace cable. Configuration Utility.
defective. RS-232 cable is Connect cable.
COM Port incorrectly On Main Page, be disconnected. Verify connectors on
configured. sure COM port is both ends are fully
selected as [Auto seated.
Detect]. RS-232 cable is Replace cable.
Installed TX System Contact MRC defective.
hardware is Technical Support. Installed TX System Contact MRC
defective. hardware is Technical Support.
defective.

Table C-2: Configurator Error Messages (Continued) C.8.2 Configurator Operational Problems
Suggested Table C-3 provides the most common operational problems with
Error Message Possible Cause the Configuration Utility and what to do if they occur.
Action
Unable to Retrieve Problem with RS- Try again. Table C-3: Configurator Operational Problems
[Setting] 232 communication. If error still appears,
Suggested
turn off STRATA TX Problem Possible Cause
OR System power, close Action
the STRATA TX TX System
Unable to Load Configuration Utility, TX System has a Power on other unit Connect power and
[Setting] then turn on TXU and a TCU, but is disconnected or turn unit on.
STRATA power and only one of them is off.
start STRATA TX detected when
Configuration Utility. DC on coax power is Verify 75 Ohm Coax
Connect to Radio not configured Power is set to On
RS-232 cable is Connect cable. Be button is clicked. correctly. for both units using
disconnected. sure connectors on the command
both ends are fully screens and verify
seated. the DC on Coax
RS-232 cable is Replace cable. switches (if present)
defective. on both the TXU and
Installed TX System Contact MRC TCU are set to ON.
hardware is Technical Support. Units not connected Connect units, or
defective. by coax cable or replace cable.
Configuration FIle Unable to read data Select a different failure in coax cable.
Corrupt stored in file chosen. configuration file. Installed TX System Contact MRC
File damaged. Re-create hardware is Technical Support.
OR configuration and defective.
save it with a COFDM Page
Unable to Open different filename.
Configuration File COFDM tab is Operation Mode set On Radio page, set
Problem with PC or Contact your PC selected but many incorrectly. Operation Mode for
its disk drive. service provider. choices are greyed at least one Preset
out. to COFDM Only -
ASI In.

Suggested Suggested
Problem Possible Cause Problem Possible Cause
Action Action
MPEG Page Digital Audio Problems
MPEG tab is Operation Mode set On Radio page, set No audio produced. Audio A or B Type Check settings for
selected but many incorrectly. Operation Mode for not set correctly. Audio A or B Type
choices are greyed at least one Preset on the MPEG page.
out. to MPEG/ COFDM No audio when Audio A or B Type Use supported audio
IF Out or MPEG using Linear Audio. not set correctly. format.
Only - ASI Out.
Analog Audio Problems
Preset not selected. Select Preset on
MPEG page by No audio produced Subcarrier Check subcarrier
clicking on Preset even though RCL is frequencies not set frequencies on both
button. high. correctly. the transmitter and
the RX.
FMT Page Use Monitor Radio
FMT tab is selected, Operation Mode set On Radio page, set to view the alarm
but many choices incorrectly. Operation Mode for status and identify
are greyed out. at least one Preset which subcarriers
to Analog IF Out. not being received.
Preset not selected. Select Preset on PC/Software Problems
FMT page by Configuration Utility Previous version of Uninstall previous
clicking on Preset won’t install on PC. STRATA TX version using the
button. Configuration Utility “Add/Remove
DVBS Page already installed. Programs” function
DVBS tab is Operation Mode set On Radio page, set in Windows Control
selected, but many incorrectly. Operation Mode for Panel.
choices are greyed at least one Preset PC does not meet See “PC
out. to DVBS. System Requirements” on
Preset not selected. Select Preset on Requirements. page C-23.
DVBS page by CD damaged. Contact MRC
clicking on Preset Technical Support.
button. Problem with PC or Contact your PC
its disk drive. service provider.

Figure C-42: Control Panel - Typical
Suggested
Problem Possible Cause
Action
Configuration Utility Incompatible See Decimal
crashes when try to Decimal Separator Separator
run. configuration. Compatibility.
Program files Use the “Add/
AND / OR damaged. Remove Programs”
function in Windows
Get “Runtime Error” Control Panel to
message. uninstall the
Configuration Utility,
then reinstall it.
Problem with PC or Contact your PC
its disk drive. service provider.
Decimal Separator Compatibility The STRATA TX
Configuration Utility software is designed to accept only the
decimal point ( . ) as the decimal separator (i.e., numbers must
be entered as 1234.567). Regional and
Language Options
If your PC is configured to use the comma ( , ) as the decimal
separator, (i.e., 1234,567) the STRATA TX Configuration Utility
will malfunction. C.9 TX System Compatibility
To avoid this, we suggest temporarily configuring your PC to use This section will give you compatibility information for the
US English while you are working with the Configuration Utility. STRATA TX Configuration Utility software and the STRATA TX
This is easily done using the Windows Control Panel (See Figure System. For Compatibility with various PCs, see “PC
C-42), using the “Regional and Language Options”. When you Requirements” on page C-23.
are done working with the STRATA TX Configuration Utility,
simply switch back to the correct language. C.9.1 STRATA TX System Compatibility
MRC is continually improving both the STRATA TX System and
its Configuration Utility software. To be sure you have the correct
STRATA TX Configuration Utility software for your TX System,
perform the following steps.

1. Apply power to your TX System (both TXU and TCU, if 5. Compare the version number in the line For use
applicable). with... to the radio version of your STRATA TX System
found in step 2.
Note In the following step, the firmware version will only 6. The version listed in the For use with... line is the
be displayed for approximately two seconds. minimum version of the TX System required (i.e., the
TX System should be that version or higher).
2. Watch the TXU/TCU alphanumeric display carefully as
the PWR switch is set to on ( I ) and note the radio If your TX System is at that version or higher, there are
version number. See Figure C-43. no compatibility issues.
Figure C-43: Typical Firmware Version Screen If your TX System version falls below that minimum,
contact MRC to check for any compatibility issues.
Radio STRATA TX
Version V X.X.X
3. Start the STRATA TX Configuration Utility software.

The TX System does not need to be connected to your
PC.
4. On the Main page, click the About button to display
the About Window. See Figure C-44.
Figure C-44: About Window

D Specifications Audio Coding: . . . . . . . . . . . MPEG–II layer 2 (ISO/IEC 13818-3)
ISO/MPEG 11172.3 Layer II (MUSICAM)
Digital Audio Inputs (Configurable): . . . Supports AES/EBU audio
This section provides specifications for the STRATA Transmitter inputs (2 pairs) balanced inputs – 48 KHz sampling
(TX) System. Audio Channels (select): . . . . . . . . Analog audio (2 stereo pairs)
balanced, 600 ohm/600 ohms High Z (selectable)
Note MRC reserves the right to make changes to Min. Audio Bit Rate: . . . . . . . 192 Kbits/channel, 384 Kbits stereo
specifications of products described in this Lower audio bit rates down to 128 Kbits selectable
specification sheet at any time without notice and
without obligation to notify any person of such Audio Input Levels: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +18 dBm clip level
changes. Transport Stream Output: . . . .Fully DVB compliant DVB–ASI per
ISO/IEC 13818-2 (188 byte packets) continuous bit rate
MPEG ENCODER SPECIFICATIONS Output Monitor Port - Front Panel Connector (70 MHz):
SDI Input: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ANSI/SMPTE 259M Level C Encryption: . . . . . . . . . BISS-1, BISS-E
270Mb/s, 525/625 Component 2 Stereo Video input: . . . . . . . . .NTSC/PAL, ASI
Audio De-embedding provided AES/EBU
WAYSIDE CHANNEL
Composite Video: . . . . . . Composite (75 ohms)1 Vpp NTSC/PAL
BNC / Return Loss, Minimum 28 dB at 6MHz Embedded data channel on MPEG Module (Uses the RS-232
port for DCE Data Path)
Chroma/Level (Selectable): . . . . . . . . . 4:2:2Profile @ Main Level
or 4:2:0 Profile @ Main Level Data Rate: . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400
Frame Size: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Horizontal Res. 720 pixels COFDM SPECIFICATIONS
Vertical Res: 480/525 NTSC, 576/625 PAL COFDM IF Output (Monitor): . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 MHz @ –5 dBm
Video Encoding Rate: COFDM Bandwidth (Selectable): . . . . . . . 6 MHz, 7 MHz, 8 MHz
2 to 30 Mbits Constant Bit Rate (4:2:2) COFDM Carriers: . . . . . . . . . . . DVB-T specifications 2K Carriers
1.5 to 15 Mbits, Constant Bit Rate (4:2:0)
Latency (Selectable) – Bit Rate Dependent: Modulation Type: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QPSK, 16QAM, 64QAM
Standard Mode: . . . . . . . . . <200 ms / Low Delay Mode: <100 ms FEC: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8
VBI Processing: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Extended Picture Mode (4:2:2) Guard Intervals (Selectable): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/32, 1/16,1/8,1/4
Closed Caption: . . . . . . Supports line 21 (NTSC) CC EIA 608 std 70 MHz Carrier Insert Capability
STRATA TX Operator’s Guide/Tech Ref Manual Specifications D-1

ANALOG AUDIO & VIDEO MODULATOR THD: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.5 % @ 1 KHz (75 KHz deviation)
Monitor Outputs: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 MHz signal/pass thru 2.0 % @ 1 KHz (200 KHz deviation)
Level output/Impedance: . . . . . . . . . . . +2 dBm Analog/75 Ohms Signal/Noise: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 dBm (min.)

Output Impedance (select): 600 ohms bal./10K ohms
Signal Inputs: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Video, Composite
70 MHz (–10 dBm Analog) Output Level (adjust): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +8 dBm - Line Level
nominal (0 dBm to +18 dBm)
Video Mute: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 MHz test tone - auto
Audio channel crosstalk: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 dB
FM Deviation (Selectable): . . . . . . . . . . 3 MHz and 4 MHz - peak
Emphasis: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 ìs/75 ìs, flat - Factory option
Video Input/Return Loss: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vpp (75 ohms)
525/625 line / > 26 dB Control Interface: . . . . . . . . . . 2 wire serial com port as DC input
Plug in Video Filter Options: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2, 5.0, 5.5 MHz FRONT PANEL CONTROLS
Video Response: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ± 0.25 dB Preset, Channel/Offset, TX Attenuation, TXU to HPU Power
@ or within video filter bandwidth DISPLAYS
VIDEO PERFORMANCE: Analog (FMT): . . . Preset, HPU Status, Frequency, Mode, Audio
Channel Frequency, Video Deviation, CW Tone, Error Report
S/N: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . > 68 dB (weighted per RS-250C)
Digital (MPEG/COFDM): . . . . . . Preset. HPU Status, Frequency,
S/H: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . > 63 dB (weighted per RS-250C) Mode, Modulation, Bandwidth, FEC, Guard Interval, Video
Diff. Phase / Gain: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 degree / 1 % Delay, Audio Mode, CW Tone, Error Report, RF Power Out
Baseband Response: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 KHz to 8 MHz CONFIGURATOR SOFTWARE MENUS
+0.5 dB / 8 MHz to 12 MHz <2 dB (RS-232 connection to PC or laptop)
Audio Channels: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Channel Analog Main: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Connect to Radio, Load Presets,
Line level: +8 dBm ( 600 ohms) Save Presets, Select Module Options,
Program Radio, Upload Radio Settings
Subcarrier input tune range: . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5 MHz to 8.59 MHz
Tunable in 2 KHz steps Radio: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating Mode, Color Bars,
CW Tone, Transmitter Attenuation
AUDIO PERFORMANCE:
COFDM: . . . . . . . . . Modulation, FEC, Bandwidth, Guard Interval
Frequency Response:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . (40 Hz - 15 KHz):±1.0 dB
(40 Hz - 10 KHz):±0.5 dB

MPEG: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .ASI Bit Rate, Wayside Baud Rate,
Chroma, Delay Mode, BISS Key/ID,
Audio Type, Audio Mode, Audio Input
FMT: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audio Channel Frequency (4),
Pre-Emphasis, Video Deviation
Channel Plan: . . . . . Select Frequency +/– Offset, Clear Channel
Plan, Load Default FCC Plan, Load
Channel Plan, Save Channel Plan


Index FMT Audio Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
MPEG Audio Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
Panel Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
AUDIO connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9, 2-10
Numerics AUDIO connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
16 QAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-13 C
75 Ohm Coax option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Calling for Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
A Channel, Selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
About This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Notices-i Channels & Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Accessing the Control Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27 Channels and Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Initial Factory Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Accessing the Main Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Accessing the Monitor Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27 US 12MHz Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
ACU COFDM Page
AC INPUT connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 Select Modulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-13
Controls, Indicators, and Connectors . . . . . . .3-10 Command and Control Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
DC OUTPUT Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10 Configuration Differences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Configurations
DC OUTPUT connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 STRATA TX System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Configurator Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7
power LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Configurator Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
POWER Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10
ACU configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Configurator, Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-23
Control
Advanced Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
airborne operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Changing a Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
TXU and/or TCU Control Operations . . . . . . . 3-35
Aircraft Remote Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
airborne operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Copyright . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Notices-i
Audience, Intended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Creating a Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Audio Configurations Creating a New Configuration Offline . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Analog Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19 D
Audio Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18 Damage in Shipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
AES/EBU Audio Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23 Data Communications Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
Audio Cable Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23 Data Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
Audio Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19 Multipurpose Data Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
Audio Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18 Networking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
STRATA TX Technical Reference Manual Index-1

Radio Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29 Mobile Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Remote Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29 Mounting to the Tripod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Wayside Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29 Portable Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Data Terminal Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-31 Selecting a Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
DC ON COAX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10, 3-3 Setting Monitor Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
DC ON COAX override switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9, 2-10 Front Panel vs. STRATA TX Configurator Settings . 3-42
DC ON COAX switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 G
DC power
HPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 General System Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
DC power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
Default to Main Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27 Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
Device Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32 H
DVB-S (Satellite) Operation Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-13 How to Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
E HPU
Enable Preset BISS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-18 DC POWER LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Encryption and Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-18 RF IN Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
RF IN connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Entering Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-22
Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 RF Output Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 RF output connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
RF POWER LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
external 70 MHz input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
HPU Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
F HPU Indicators and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
factory default settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 I
feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
IDU
Floor/Bulkhead Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
FMT Audio Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-19
Indoor Unit
FMT Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
See IDU
Frequently Performed Tasks
Initial
Changing a Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-37
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Controlling TCU to TXU DC on Coax . . . . . . .3-40
Initial Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Controlling TXU to HPU DC Power on Coax . 3-39
Inspection
Controlling TXU to TCU DC on Coax . . . . . . .3-39
Initial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Powering the STRATA TX System . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Preparing for Operation
bulkhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Universal Mounting Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Checks before power-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-35 Multipurpose Data Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
Fixed Mounting Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 wiring diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Multi-Unit Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Initial power-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35 N
mobile applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Powering Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35 Network
Device Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
K Interface Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
Key features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Lantronix UDS-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
L NOT ON CHANNEL message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Loading a Configuration From a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 O
M On-Line Viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Notices-ii
Operational Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Manage the Channel Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-22
General System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Messages, Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Mobile Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Ordering Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Modifications, Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-35
Output, Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Monitor Output, Selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-39
Monitoring P
Using the Monitor Screens in Analog - IF Mode 3-33 Panel Data Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
Using the Monitor Screens in COFDM - IF Mode 3-28 Portable Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Using the Monitor Screens in COFDM ASI In Mode 3-31 universal mounting bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Using the Monitor Screens in DVB-S Mode . . 3-34 portable operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Using the Monitor Screens in Ext IF Input Mode 3-32 Power Cable Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Mounting and Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 DC Branched Wire Harness Assembly . . . . . 6-15
MPEG/COFDM Encoder/Modulator Module . . . . . . . . 9-3 DC to DC Wire Harness Assembly . . . . . . . . 6-15
MRC Customer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Power Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
MRC Technical Support Additional Powering Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
E-mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3, 7-1 Power Distribution
MRC Tripod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 coaxial cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Dovetail Adapter Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11, 3-12 Power Options
Fixed Mounting Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 TXU and TCU - separate locations . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Mounting Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 TXU and TCU co-located . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Quick Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12

Power Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12 R
Supply Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Power requirements Regulatory Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Notices-i
HPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Related Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12 Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Power Supply and Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12 Remote Control Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
mating connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14 Remote Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Panel Power Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13 Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
TXU and TCU Co-Located . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
TXU and TCU Separated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13 External Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Powering the STRATA System Mounting Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
RF POWER LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Superimposing DC Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
RS-232 data connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
Powering the STRATA TX System
Single TCU Power Up and Power Down . . . . 3-14 S
Single TXU Power up and Power Down . . . . . 3-15 Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Superimposing DC Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14 Main Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Superimposing DC Power with Manual Control 3-14 Select Operation Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-10
TXU and HPU Power Up and Power Down . . 3-21 Select Preset ASI Bit Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-17
TXU and TCU Power Up and Power Down - Select Preset Audio A Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-17
Co-Located . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17 Select Preset Audio A Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-17
TXU and TCU Power Up and Power Down - Select Preset Audio A Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-17
Separate Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18 Select Preset Audio B Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-18
TXU, TCU, and HPU Power Up and Power Down - Select Preset Audio B Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-17
TXU and TCU Co- Located . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22 Select Preset Audio B Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-17
TXU, TCU, and HPU Power Up and Power Down - Select Preset Audio Sub-Carrier Configuration . . . . C-19
TXU and TCU Separate Locations . . . . . . . . . 3-24 Select Preset Chroma Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-16
Preset, Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37 Select Preset Delay Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-17
Primary STRATA TX System features . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1 Select Preset Network Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-16
Proprietary Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Notices-i Select Preset Service Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-15
Q Select Preset Video Deviation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-19
QPSK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-13 Select Preset Video Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-16
Quality Certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Notices-i Select Wayside Channel Baud Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . C-17
Select Wayside Channel State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-17
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Signal Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28 Load or Program a Single Page . . . . . . . . . . . C-5
Single Unit Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Load or Program Entire Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5
Standard Remote Control Panel Load or Program Individual Presets . . . . . . . . C-6
mobile operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Loading a Configuration From a File . . . . . . . 5-19
STRATA ACU Loading a Configuration From the TX . . . . . . 5-22
portable deployment applications . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Main page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
standalone TXU or TCU operations . . . . . . . . . 2-8 MPEG Page . . . . . . . . . . . . C-15, C-16, C-17, C-18
STRATA Aircraft Remote Control Panel Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
Controls, Indicators, and Connectors . . . . . . .3-11 Progress Bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4
controls, indicators, and connectors . . . . . . . . 3-11 save a configuration to a file . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
STRATA HPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Saving the Configuration to a File . . . . . . . . . 5-39
STRATA Remote Control Panel settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Controls, Indicators, and Connectors . . . . . . .3-11 Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
STRATA Remote Control Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Tabs, Pages and Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
STRATA TX Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-29 TX System Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-29
STRATA TX Configurator Working With the Configurator . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2 STRATA TX Configurator Pages
Channel Plan Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-21, C-22 Main Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7
Configurator Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . C-25 Radio Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-9, C-10
Configurator Operational Problems . . . . . . . C-27 STRATA TX Configurator software . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6, 5-1
Configurator Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1 STRATA TX System
Configurator Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . C-25 components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
create a configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 controls, indicators, and connectors . . . . . . . . 3-2
create a new configuration offline . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Creating a Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Error Status digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Dynamic Button Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3 input voltage requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
FMT Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-18, C-19 key features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Front Panel vs. Configurator . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-22 Operating voltage ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Greyed-out Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2 Primary Error Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Greyed-out Choices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2 Unit ID digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Greyed-Out Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1 STRATA TX System components
Installing the Configurator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-23 ACU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
load a configuration from a file . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 HPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Load and Program Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4 Remote Control Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

TCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 alphanumeric display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
TXU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 AUDIO Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
superimposed DC power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4, 6-13 AUDIO connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Superimposing DC Power with Manual Control . . . . 3-14 block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Supported Repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Control Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
System Controls, Indicators, and Connectors . . . . . . . 3-5
Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 DC ON COAX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 DC ON COAX override switch . . . . . . . . 2-10, 2-11
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 DC ON COAX Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Configurations, Typical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 DC ON COAX switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 DC POWER LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Options FMT module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Monitor (MON) Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 MPEG/COFDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 POWER connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 PWR Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 RS-232 Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
System Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1 RS-232 connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
System architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1 SIGNAL IN Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
System Components SIGNAL IN connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
STRATA ACU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 SIGNAL OUT Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
STRATA HPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6, 2-7 SIGNAL OUT connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
STRATA Remote Control Panels . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Status LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
STRATA TCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6, 2-7 XMIT LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
STRATA TXU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 TCU - New Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
System Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 TCU - Older Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 TCU Audio and Video Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
System Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 Video Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
System Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 TCU configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
System Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 TCU Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
T TCU to TXU DC on Coax, Controlling . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3, 7-1
TCU Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
75 Ohm Coax option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Command and Control Power Supply . . . . . . . 9-3
Alphanumeric Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

FMT Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 HPU Coax option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
HPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 INPUT Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
HPU Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 MPEG/CODFM module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
MPEG/COFDM Encoder/Modulator Module . . . 9-3 PWR Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
TCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 PWR/RS-485 connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
TCU Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Rear Panel DC ON COAX Switch . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
TXU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 RF Output Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
TXU Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 RS-232 Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
transmit antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Status LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Tripod Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 XMIT LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 TXU - New Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 TXU - Older Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 TXU and TCU
Error Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 front panel control switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
general system problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 TXU and TCU Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Operational Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 TXU and/or TCU screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Primary Error Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3, 4-10 TXU Audio and Video Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
Status LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Audio Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
Unit ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-10 Video Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
video problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 TXU Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
TX TXU Front Panel DC ON COAX Switch . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
PWR Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 TXU IF/RF module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
TX Configurator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 TXU or TCU
TXU single-unit applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
70 MHz COFDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 TXU Rear Panel DC ON COAX Switch . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Alphanumeric Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 TXU to HPU DC Power on Coax, Controlling . . . . . 3-39
AUDIO Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 TXU to TCU DC on Coax, Controlling . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
AUDIO connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9, 2-10 TXU, TCU, and HPU
Control Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 integrated system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Controls, indicators, and connectors . . . . . . . . . 3-2 TXU, TCU, HPU, and ACU
DC ON COAX override switch . . . . . . . . 2-9, 2-10 supported field repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
FMT IF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 U
FMT module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Unit vs.System Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Front Panel DC ON COAX Switch . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
UNLOCKED message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Using the Monitor Screens in MPEG Output Mode . . 3-30
V
Video input options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Video Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
W
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Notices-iii
Product Manufactured by MRC . . . . . . . Notices-iii
Products Manufactured By Others . . . . Notices-iii
Wayside
Data connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
Wayside Data
Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
Wayside Connections to the Serial Port . . . . . 6-30
Wayside Transmitter to Receiver Connections 6-30
Wayside Data connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30

STRATA TX TECH REF MANUAL Rev C

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

STRATA TX TECH REF MANUAL Rev C

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

STRATA TX TECH REF MANUAL Rev C

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

STRATA TX System

Analog + Digital Portable 1.9 -2.5,

Technical Reference Manual

STRATA TX Technical Reference Manual i

CAUTION Follow CAUTIONS to prevent damage to WARNING: Risk of Electric Shock

CAUTION: Electrostatic Discharge. Possible

On-Line Viewing -OR-

STRATA TX Technical Reference Manual ii

STRATA TX Technical Reference Manual iii

STRATA TX Technical Reference Manual iv

STRATA TX Technical Reference Manual Contents-1

STRATA TX Technical Reference Manual Contents-2

STRATA TX Technical Reference Manual Contents-3

STRATA TX Technical Reference Manual Contents-4

STRATA TX Technical Reference Manual Introduction 1-1

STRATA TX Technical Reference Manual Introduction 1-2

• Approximate purchase date.

or • Model number and serial number of the unit. This is

STRATA TX Technical Reference Manual Introduction 1-3

1.10 Tell Us What You Think!

Or, you can E-mail our Technical Support team at:

STRATA TX Technical Reference Manual Introduction 1-4

STRATA TX Operator’s Guide/Tech Ref Manual Product Description 2-1

1.84 MHz OOK Tone

RS-232 +10.5 to +48 VDC RS-232 +10.5 to +48 VDC

STRATA TX Operator’s Guide/Tech Ref Manual Product Description 2-2

For portable mobile or airborne operations, the STRATA TX

STRATA TX Operator’s Guide/Tech Ref Manual Product Description 2-3

STRATA TX Operator’s Guide/Tech Ref Manual Product Description 2-4

STRATA TX Operator’s Guide/Tech Ref Manual Product Description 2-5

STRATA TX Operator’s Guide/Tech Ref Manual Product Description 2-6

2.3.2 STRATA TCU

STRATA TX Operator’s Guide/Tech Ref Manual Product Description 2-7

Figure 2-7: STRATA HPU Figure 2-8: STRATA ACU

2.3.4 STRATA ACU

STRATA TX Operator’s Guide/Tech Ref Manual Product Description 2-8

Figure 2-9: Standard Remote Control Panel

STRATA TX Operator’s Guide/Tech Ref Manual Product Description 2-9

switch will be located on the rear of the TXU to allow manual

Figure 2-11: TXU - Older Configuration

TCU Several different configurations of the TCU also exist as

STRATA TX Operator’s Guide/Tech Ref Manual Product Description 2-10

TX TCU XMIT TX TCU

POWER SIGNAL OUT Monitor (MON) AUDIO

Rear View SIGNAL IN

STRATA TX Operator’s Guide/Tech Ref Manual Product Description 2-11

2.6 For More Information

STRATA TX Operator’s Guide/Tech Ref Manual Product Description 2-12

STRATA TX Operator’s Guide/Tech Ref Manual Product Description 2-13

70 MHz IF Output Only TXU HPU

NTSC or PAL Analog Video TXU HPU

SDI, ASI, NTSC or PAL TXU HPU

Analog Video or TXU HPU

NTSC or PAL Analog

STRATA TX Operator’s Guide/Tech Ref Manual Product Description 2-14

STRATA TX Operator’s Guide/Tech Ref Manual Routine Operation 3-1

Controls, indicators, and connectors contained on the TXU are

STRATA TX Operator’s Guide/Tech Ref Manual Routine Operation 3-2

STRATA TX Operator’s Guide/Tech Ref Manual Routine Operation 3-3